WO2023185886A1 - Photographing method and electronic device - Google Patents

Photographing method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023185886A1
WO2023185886A1 PCT/CN2023/084524 CN2023084524W WO2023185886A1 WO 2023185886 A1 WO2023185886 A1 WO 2023185886A1 CN 2023084524 W CN2023084524 W CN 2023084524W WO 2023185886 A1 WO2023185886 A1 WO 2023185886A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
camera
area
interface
screen
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/084524
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
叶晓贞
魏康明
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023185886A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023185886A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H04M1/72454User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions according to context-related or environment-related conditions

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular, to a photographing method and electronic equipment.
  • This application provides a shooting method and electronic equipment, which realizes the diversity of taking photos with a roll-screen mobile phone and improves the user's photo-taking experience.
  • the present application provides a shooting method, which is applied to an electronic device including a scroll screen.
  • the scroll screen includes a first state and a second state, wherein in the first state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a first state. area, in the second state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes the second area and the third area; the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state is greater than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the first state; the method includes: When the scroll screen is in the first state, the electronic device displays a first camera interface in the first area.
  • the first camera interface includes images collected in real time by the first camera in the first shooting mode and first shooting controls; the electronic device After receiving the first operation, the scroll screen is expanded to the second state; when the scroll screen is in the second state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area, displays the second interface in the third area, and the first interface and the third camera interface are displayed in the third area.
  • the two camera interfaces are different.
  • the second interface is any one of the following: a gallery interface, a second camera interface, a picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect, or an image of the target object in the picture collected in real time by the first camera. .
  • the second interface when the second interface is the second camera interface, that is, the electronic device can display two camera interfaces at the same time.
  • the second camera interface includes images captured by the second camera in real time in the second shooting mode.
  • the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode, and the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode and the second shooting control. .
  • the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect may also be called a first picture.
  • the picture effect of the first picture is different from the picture effect of the picture collected in real time by the first camera.
  • the first effect includes any of the following: filter effect, background effect, size effect, resolution effect, and clarity effect.
  • the diversity of photography with scroll screen mobile phones is achieved, and the user's photography experience is improved.
  • the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are the same or different, and the first camera and the second camera are different.
  • the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display different cameras and use the same or different shooting modes to collect images.
  • the first camera is a front-facing camera and the second camera is a rear-facing camera.
  • the first camera is the main camera among the rear cameras, and the second camera is the wide-angle camera among the rear cameras.
  • the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are different, and the first camera and the second camera are the same.
  • the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display the same camera and use different shooting modes to collect images.
  • the first camera and the second camera are both rear-facing and front-facing cameras
  • the first shooting mode is the first filter
  • the second shooting mode is the second filter.
  • the user can display images processed by different filter effects on the first camera interface and the second camera interface respectively, so that the user can compare and select a filter with better photo effects for taking photos.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device detects a second operation on the first shooting control, and saves the image captured by the first camera in the first shooting mode to an album.
  • the electronic device detects the third operation on the second shooting control, and saves the image captured by the second camera in the second shooting mode to the photo album. In this way, the user can respectively control saving the images displayed in the first camera interface or the second camera interface to the photo album.
  • the shooting mode includes any of the following: night scene mode, portrait mode, large aperture mode, photo mode, video mode, professional mode, time-lapse mode, different focal length mode, Different wide angle modes.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the fourth operation, A third camera interface is jointly displayed on the second area and the third area.
  • the third camera interface includes real-time captured images of the first camera in the first shooting mode and the first shooting control.
  • the third camera interface includes the second camera. Real-time captured footage and secondary shooting controls in the second shooting mode.
  • the second camera interface further includes a camera switching control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays the second interface in the third area, the method also The method includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area, and the fourth camera interface includes images collected in real time by the third camera in the second shooting mode, or includes a third camera interface. The real-time captured images and second shooting controls of the three cameras in the second shooting mode. In this way, the electronic device can switch to display images collected by different cameras.
  • the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area, specifically including: the electronic device receives and responds For the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the first prompt information is output; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, The electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area.
  • the prompt information is used to prompt the user to switch the displayed image collected by which camera.
  • the electronic device while the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device also displays the first control; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device Displaying the fourth camera interface in the third area specifically includes: after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device receives and responds to the trigger operation for the first control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area. This way, the user can choose which camera to switch to.
  • the second camera interface further includes a third mode selection control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays the second interface in the third area, the method It also includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the sixth operation of the third mode selection control, the electronic device displays a fifth camera interface in the third area, and the fifth camera interface includes images collected in real time by the second camera in the third shooting mode, Or include real-time images collected by the second camera in the third shooting mode and second shooting controls. In this way, the electronic device can receive a user's operation to switch between different photographing modes, for example, switching from photographing mode to video recording mode.
  • the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, and at the same time displays the first image processed with the second effect in the third area.
  • Pictures collected by the camera in real time; among them, the first effect and the second effect are different.
  • the picture captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect may also be called the second picture.
  • the electronic device can simultaneously display multiple pictures processed with different picture effects in the third area, so that the user can compare the pictures processed with different picture effects.
  • the scroll screen further includes a third state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a fourth area and a fifth area.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state; after the electronic device unfolds the scroll screen to the second state, the method also includes: the electronic device receives a seventh operation; in response to the seventh operation, the electronic device The device expands the scroll screen to the third state; when the scroll screen is in the third state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the fourth area, and displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the fifth area. Pictures collected in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect; where the first effect and the second effect are different. In this way, the electronic device can display other effect-processed images after the scroll screen continues to expand.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives an eighth operation for the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the eighth operation, the electronic device uses The real-time captured images of the first camera processed by the first effect are saved to the photo album.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives a ninth operation for the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the ninth operation, the electronic device stops displaying The picture collected by the first camera in real time is processed with the first effect. That is, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to delete the images collected by the first camera in real time and processed with the first effect.
  • the electronic device while the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, the electronic device displays the image processed with the second effect in the third area.
  • the method also includes: the electronic device receives a tenth operation; in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays the image captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect on the second area, and in the third area The screen captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect is displayed on the screen. In this way, the electronic device does not display the camera interface, but displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect and the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the second effect in full screen.
  • the electronic device displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect on the second area, and displays the third image processed with the second effect on the third area.
  • the method also includes: the electronic device receives an eleventh operation; in response to the eleventh operation, the electronic device adjusts the size of the second area and the third area, and the scroll screen can be displayed in the second state. The area remains unchanged. In this way, the electronic device can adjust the size of the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the third effect and the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed by the second effect.
  • the electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state, specifically including: the electronic device receives the first operation and outputs the second prompt information; After the device outputs the second prompt information, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state. In this way, the user's misoperation is prevented from causing the electronic device to unfold the scroll screen.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives a twelfth operation; responds In the twelfth operation, the electronic device displays the second interface in the second area and the first camera interface in the third area. In this way, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to switch the display position of the interface in the second area and the third area.
  • this application provides an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a scroll screen, and one or more memories; wherein the scroll screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors. , one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and one or more processors call the computer instructions to enable a shooting method provided in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects of the electronic device .
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device causes the electronic device to execute any of the above aspects provided in any possible implementation manner.
  • this application provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is run on an electronic device, it causes the electronic device to execute a photographing method provided in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1A-1C exemplarily show a schematic diagram of an electronic device 100 unfolding an expansion screen provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 2 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 3 schematically shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • 4A-4P exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 displaying two camera interfaces at the same time
  • 5A to 5X exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 simultaneously displaying a camera interface and a filter picture
  • 6A-6E exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 simultaneously displays a camera interface and a gallery interface
  • FIG. 7A-7H exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying an enlarged target object on a scroll screen
  • FIG. 8A-8F exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 displays the detailed information of the recognized target object on the scroll screen;
  • 9A-9G exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 switching a target object
  • FIG. 10A schematically shows a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 displaying pictures of different sizes
  • 11A-11B exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying accessories
  • Figures 12A-12C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of three display forms of the folding screen
  • FIG. 13 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a shooting method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only and shall not be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” The meaning is two or more.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • 1A-1C exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 unfolding the extended screen.
  • the display screen shown in (a) of FIG. 1A is the original screen.
  • the original screen consists of a display screen with length X and width Y.
  • the state of the scroll screen shown in (a) of FIG. 1A may also be called an unexpanded state.
  • the scroll screen in the unexpanded state may also be called the scroll screen in the first state, and the visible display area of the scroll screen in the first state includes the first area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation. In response to the user's operation, the electronic device 100 unfolds the display screen to the right to obtain the extended screen one shown in (b) in FIG. 1A .
  • the extended screen one is located on the right side of the original screen. It consists of a display screen with length Z and width Y.
  • the display screen shown in (b) in Figure 1A consists of an original screen and an extended screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can continue to expand the display screen to obtain a larger extended screen.
  • the electronic device 100 continues to receive user operations.
  • the electronic device 100 continues to unfold the display screen to the right, resulting in the display shown in (c) in FIG. 1A .
  • Extended screen two extended screen two is located next to the original screen On the right, extended screen two consists of a display screen with a length of W and a width of U.
  • the display screen shown in (c) in Figure 1A consists of an original screen and an extended screen.
  • the state of the scroll screen shown in (b) or (c) of FIG. 1A may also be called a semi-expanded state.
  • the scroll screen in the semi-expanded state may also be called the scroll screen in the second state.
  • the visible display area of the scroll screen in the second state includes the second area and the third area. The second area may be the same as the first area, or may be different.
  • the electronic device 100 can continue to expand the display screen to obtain an expanded screen with a larger size. As shown in (c) and (d) in FIG. 1A , the electronic device 100 continues to receive user operations. In response to the user operation, the electronic device 100 continues to expand the display screen to the right, resulting in the display shown in (d) in FIG. 1A .
  • Extended screen three is located on the right side of the original screen. The extended screen three consists of a display screen with a length of W and a width of U.
  • the display screen shown in (d) in Figure 1A consists of an original screen and an extended screen.
  • the state of the scroll screen shown in (d) in FIG. 1A may also be referred to as the fully unfolded state.
  • the scroll screen in the fully unfolded state may also be called the scroll screen in the third state.
  • the visible display area of the scroll screen in the third state includes a fourth area and a fifth area.
  • the fourth area may be the same as the second area, or may be different.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to expansion to obtain three expansion screens of different sizes.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain other expansion screens of any size, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to obtaining an extended screen on the right side of the original screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can also obtain an expanded screen on the left side of the original screen, for example, as shown in (a) to (d) in FIG. 1B .
  • the electronic device 100 obtains the operation method of the expanded screen on the left side of the original screen, which is the same as in (a) to (d) in FIG. 1A , the operation method of the electronic device 100 to obtain the extended screen on the right side of the original screen is the same.
  • the embodiment of the present application will not elaborate on the operation method of how to obtain the extended screen.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to having an extended screen on the left or right side of the original screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can also have an extended screen above or below the original screen. This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. .
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to extending to the left or right side of the original screen to obtain an extended screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can also obtain an expanded screen on the right side of the original screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can also be extended on the right side of the original screen.
  • the left side of the original screen gets expanded screen two.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user operation.
  • the electronic device 100 obtains (b) in FIG. 1C on the right side of the original screen.
  • the extended screen one shown is located on the right side of the original screen.
  • the extended screen one consists of a display screen with a length of Z and a width of Y.
  • the display screen shown in (b) in Figure 1C consists of an original screen and an extended screen. Afterwards, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 1C , the electronic device 100 continues to receive user operations. In response to the user operation, the electronic device 100 obtains an expanded screen on the left side of the original screen, resulting in (c in FIG. 1C ), the extended screen two is located on the left side of the original screen.
  • the extended screen two consists of a display screen with a length of Z and a width of Y.
  • the display screen shown in (c) in Figure 1C consists of an original screen, an extended screen one and an extended screen two.
  • the state of the scroll screen shown in (c) in FIG. 1C may also be called a fully unfolded state.
  • the scroll screen in the fully expanded state may also be called the scroll screen in the third state.
  • the visible display area of the scroll screen in the third state includes a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area.
  • the sixth area may be the same as the first area, or may be different.
  • the expansion screen one shown in (b) in FIG. 1C and the expansion screen two shown in (c) in FIG. 1B have the same size.
  • the expansion screen one shown in (b) in FIG. 1C and the expansion screen two shown in (c) in FIG. 1B may also have different sizes, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to having an expanded screen on the left side of the original screen and the right side of the original screen at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 can also be expanded above the original screen and below the original screen at the same time. Screen.
  • the above are only illustrative examples of several ways to obtain an extended screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can also obtain extended screens in other arrangements, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic structural diagram of the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may be a large screen, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), a netbook, a cellular phone, or a personal digital computer.
  • Assistant personal digital assistant, PDA
  • augmented reality (AR) device virtual reality (VR) device
  • artificial intelligence artificial intelligence, AI
  • wearable device wearable device
  • vehicle-mounted device smart home device and/or smart city equipment
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • a processor 110 an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, some components may be separated, or some components may be arranged differently.
  • the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit
  • the controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial derail clock line (SCL).
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
  • the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, the wireless communication module 160, and the like.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
  • power management module 141 It may also be provided in the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
  • the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , demodulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • GPU is the graphics processing unit
  • the processing microprocessor is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • Display 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED organic light-emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the display screen 194 in Figure 2 can be stretched or contracted.
  • the above-mentioned display screen 194 can be stretched means that the display screen can be expanded from the original size to a stretched state in the horizontal direction, and can be maintained in the stretched state.
  • the display screen of the original size can be called Original screen
  • a display screen that is expanded on the original size of the display screen can be called an extended screen.
  • the aforementioned display screen 194 can be contracted means that the display screen can be contracted from a stretched state to its original size in the horizontal direction, and can be maintained at the original size.
  • the original screen and the extended screen may be one screen, or may be a display screen composed of multiple screens put together, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise and brightness. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • MPEG2 MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural network
  • Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • the internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (NVM).
  • RAM random access memories
  • NVM non-volatile memories
  • Random access memory can include static random-access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory, DDR SDRAM, for example, the fifth generation DDR SDRAM is generally called DDR5SDRAM), etc.; non-volatile memory can include disk storage devices and flash memory (flash memory).
  • SRAM static random-access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • non-volatile memory can include disk storage devices and flash memory (flash memory).
  • Flash memory can be divided according to the operating principle to include NOR FLASH, NAND FLASH, 3D NAND FLASH, etc.
  • the storage unit potential level it can include single-level storage cells (single-level cell, SLC), multi-level storage cells (multi-level cell, MLC), third-level storage unit (triple-level cell, TLC), fourth-level storage unit (quad-level cell, QLC), etc., which can include universal flash storage (English: universal flash storage, UFS) according to storage specifications. , embedded multi media card (embedded multi media Card, eMMC), etc.
  • the random access memory can be directly read and written by the processor 110, can be used to store executable programs (such as machine instructions) of the operating system or other running programs, and can also be used to store user and application data, etc.
  • the non-volatile memory can also store executable programs and user and application program data, etc., and can be loaded into the random access memory in advance for direct reading and writing by the processor 110.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external non-volatile memory to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 .
  • the external non-volatile memory communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in external non-volatile memory.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • Microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
  • the headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones.
  • the headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 .
  • pressure sensors 180A there are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations that act on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities Can correspond to different operating instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
  • Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance.
  • Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
  • Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
  • Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also known as "touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • touching The sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 at a location different from that of the display screen 194 .
  • Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
  • the buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc.
  • Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations for different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calls and data communications.
  • the electronic device 100 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • This embodiment of the present invention takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 3 is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor.
  • the layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime and system libraries, and kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message and other applications.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • API application programming interface
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can obtain the display size and determine whether there is a status bar. Lock screen, capture screen and more.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications.
  • Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc.
  • a view system can be used to build applications.
  • the display interface can be composed of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 .
  • call status management including connected, hung up, etc.
  • the resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
  • the notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android Runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
  • System libraries can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition, and layer processing.
  • 2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
  • the following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
  • the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation and the control corresponding to the click operation as a camera application icon control as an example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area.
  • a camera interface After that, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation (the first operation), and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may be on the second area
  • the first camera interface is displayed, and the second camera interface is displayed in the third area, that is, the electronic device 100 can display two camera interfaces at the same time.
  • the second camera interface may display images captured by a different camera than the first camera interface.
  • the first camera interface displays images captured by a rear camera
  • the second camera interface displays images captured by a front camera.
  • the second camera interface may display images collected by the same camera using different photographing parameters as the first camera interface.
  • Photography parameters include but are not limited to: filter, wide angle, focal length, exposure, aperture, shutter, flash, etc.
  • the second camera interface and the first camera interface can both display images captured by the rear camera, but the second camera interface displays images captured by the main camera among the rear cameras, while the first camera interface displays images captured by the rear camera. Picture captured by the wide-angle camera in the camera.
  • 4A-4P exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying two camera interfaces at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a home screen interface 301.
  • the interface 301 displays a page with application icons placed thereon.
  • the page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icon, stock application icon). , calculator app icon, settings app icon, mail app icon, music app icon, video app icon, browser app icon, map app icon, etc.).
  • Page indicators are also displayed below multiple application icons to indicate the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages.
  • There are multiple tray icons below the page indicator (such as dialer application icon, message application icon, contact application icon, camera application icon), and the tray icon remains displayed when the page is switched.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation (such as clicking) on the camera application icon. In response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 302 as shown in FIG. 4B .
  • the area where the camera interface 302 is located is the third a region.
  • the camera interface 302 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, Recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 306.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the image captured by the camera in the thumbnail display area 304 .
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation one. As shown in FIG. 4B , the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen. After the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area. .
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area.
  • the size of the second area and the first area may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 in the second area of the scroll screen, and may also display the camera interface 308 in the third area.
  • the camera interface 308 may only include a camera capture screen display area and a shooting control 310 .
  • the electronic device 100 before the electronic device 100 displays the images captured by the camera on the camera interface 308, the electronic device 100 can display prompt information as shown in Figure 4C on the camera interface 308.
  • the prompt information is used to prompt the user how to improve shooting.
  • the content of the prompt message can be "Hold the phone about 20 centimeters, and the angle between the phone and the person's face is 45 degrees. It will be better to take pictures when standing in a bright place.”
  • the electronic device 100 before the electronic device 100 displays the picture captured by the camera on the camera interface 308, the electronic device 100 can also display a video or picture on the camera interface 308.
  • the video or picture is used to guide the user's photography posture and improve photography. Effect.
  • the electronic device 100 may display prompt information and then display the video or picture.
  • the prompt information, video or picture is used to guide the user's photography posture and improve the photography effect. .
  • the electronic device 100 may not display prompt information, videos or pictures, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the camera interface 308 may only include the camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 310 and setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area displays the screen 311 collected by the front camera.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click) on the shooting control 310, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display a thumbnail of the screen 311 as shown in FIG. 4E in the thumbnail display area 304. picture.
  • the camera interface 308 may not include the shooting control 310 , that is, the camera interface 308 only includes the frame 311 .
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input operation on the shooting control 303 and save the picture 306 and the picture 311 to the gallery respectively.
  • the electronic device 100 can first receive the user's input operation on the picture 306 (such as a long press operation), and then the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation on the shooting control 303 (such as a click ), in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 306 to the gallery.
  • the electronic device 100 can first receive the user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on the picture 311, and then the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as a click) on the shooting control 303, In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the screen 311 to the gallery.
  • the camera interface 308 may include a camera capture screen display area, a shooting control 310, a thumbnail display area 312, a front/rear camera switching control 313, and camera setting options (night scene options). , portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area displays the screen captured by the front camera 311.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 310 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display a thumbnail of the screen 311 in the thumbnail display area 312 .
  • the camera interface 308 may include a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 310, thumbnail display area 312, front/rear camera switching control 313, setting controls, etc., camera capture
  • the screen display area displays the screen 311 collected by the front camera.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 310 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display a thumbnail of the screen 311 in the thumbnail display area 312 .
  • the front/rear camera switching control 313 can receive a user's input operation. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 switches the front camera to another camera (such as a rear camera), or changes the front camera to another camera (such as a rear camera). The rear camera switches to the front camera.
  • the rear camera includes multiple cameras, such as main camera, telephoto camera, wide-angle camera, macro camera, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can give prompt information, which prompts the user to choose which camera among the rear cameras to use to capture the image and display it in the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may not give prompt information, but use a preset camera (for example, a telephoto camera) to capture images and display them on the third area.
  • a preset camera for example, a telephoto camera
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation for switching the front/rear camera control 313.
  • the electronic device 100 outputs prompt information 333 as shown in Figure 4I,
  • the prompt information 333 is used to prompt the user to select the type of the first camera and the second camera.
  • the first camera may be the camera that collects the picture 306, and the second camera may be the camera that collects the picture 311.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user operation and selects the first camera type as the main camera, and selects the second camera type as wide-angle. After selection, as shown in Figure 4K As shown in the figure, the electronic device 100 displays the image captured by the main camera on the left side of the dividing line 307 and displays the image captured by the wide-angle camera on the right side of the dividing line 307 .
  • the video recording option in the camera setting options shown in FIGS. 4F to 4K can receive the user's input operation, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 can display the video shooting screen on the second camera interface. In this way, the electronic device 100 can display the picture shooting screen on the first camera interface, and display the video shooting screen on the second camera interface.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (eg, click) for the video recording option in the camera setting options in the camera interface 308 .
  • a user's input operation eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 displays as shown in FIG. The user interface shown in 4M.
  • the video shooting screen display area in the camera interface 308 displays the video shooting screen, and the display state of the shooting control 310 is switched from the camera state to the video recording state.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the shooting control 310.
  • the electronic device 100 saves the video shooting screen displayed in the video shooting screen display area in the camera interface 308 locally. .
  • the electronic device 100 can directly display the video shooting screen on the camera interface 308.
  • the camera interface 308 can only include the video shooting screen display area and the shooting control 316. , set controls, etc. Among them, the display state of the shooting control 316 is the shooting state.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the shooting control 316. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the video shooting screen displayed in the video shooting screen display area in the camera interface 308 locally. .
  • the camera interface 308 shown in FIG. 4M may also include a thumbnail display area 312, a front/rear camera switching control 313, etc.
  • the camera interface 308 shown in Figure 4M may also include a thumbnail display area 312, front/rear camera switching control 313, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video recording options) Options, Professional Options, More Options), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state, and the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area.
  • the scroll screen has not been unfolded, and the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation.
  • the first camera interface is displayed in the first area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's operation, and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may jointly display the first camera interface or the second camera interface in the second area and the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can expand the display area of the camera interface, so that the image content collected by the camera in the camera interface is richer.
  • the operation of triggering the electronic device 100 to jointly display the first camera interface or the second camera interface in the second area and the third area may be different from operation two.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first camera interface on the second area and the second camera interface on the third area. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive a user operation, so that the electronic device 100 may jointly display the first camera interface or the second camera interface in the second area and the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can expand the display area of the camera interface, so that the image content collected by the camera in the camera interface is richer.
  • FIG. 4N exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 displaying the second camera interface on the third area.
  • Figure 4N shows camera interface 317.
  • the area where the camera interface 317 is located is the third area.
  • the camera interface 317 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 321, thumbnail display area 319, front/rear camera switching control 320, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo taking options, Recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 318.
  • the difference between the screen 318 and the screen 306 shown in FIG. 4B is that the content in the screen 318 is richer than the content in the screen 306 .
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's rotation operation and switch the display direction of the second camera interface. In this way, the display ratio of the picture captured by the camera in the second camera interface can be changed.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's rotation operation on the electronic device 100 (for example, an operation of rotating 90 degrees clockwise). In response to the user's rotation operation, the electronic device 100 will display the camera as shown in FIG. 4P Interface 322.
  • the display form of the electronic device 100 is a display form rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction.
  • the camera interface 322 shown in Figure 4P includes a camera capture screen display area, a shooting control 321, a thumbnail display area 319, a front/rear camera switching control 320, and camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, and large aperture options). , photo options, video options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 323.
  • the difference between the screen 323 and the screen 318 shown in FIG. 4N is that the display ratios of the screen 323 and the screen 318 are different. For example, the display ratio of the screen 323 is 3:4, and the display ratio of the screen 318 is 4:3.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area.
  • One camera interface the picture collected by the camera is displayed in the first camera interface.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation on the shooting control on the first camera interface. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the first camera interface in the second area, and display one or more pictures collected by the camera using different parameter values of the same photography parameter in the third area.
  • Different parameter values for the same photography parameter can be: different filter effects, different wide-angle parameters, different focal length parameters, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface on the second area, and display one or more pictures collected by the camera processed with multiple (at least two) photography parameters on the third area.
  • Various photography parameters can be any two or more of the following: filter, wide angle, focal length, exposure, aperture, shutter, flash.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's operation three, so that the display area of the scroll screen continues to increase.
  • the enlarged displayable area of the scroll screen includes the fourth area and the fifth area
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the fourth area, and display the picture collected by the camera in the fifth area with different parameter values of the same photographing parameter or the picture collected by the camera in multiple (at least two) photographing parameters.
  • One or more pictures are processed, but the arrangement of the one or more pictures displayed in the fifth area and the one or more pictures displayed in the third area are different.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation 4, select one or more pictures in the third area or the fifth area and save them in the photo album.
  • the electronic device 100 may not display the camera interface, but display one or more pictures captured by the camera on the second area and the third area and processed with different parameter values of the same photography parameter. , or one or more pictures in which the pictures collected by the camera are processed with multiple (at least two) photographing parameters.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's left and right movement operation on the dividing line, and change the display area size of the interface displayed on the left and right sides of the dividing line.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's selection operation on one or more pictures displayed on the scroll screen, and save the one or more pictures selected by the user in the gallery.
  • 5A-5X exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 simultaneously displays a camera interface and a filter picture.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation for a setting option in the camera setting options (for example, click), in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 displays the option bar 501 as shown in FIG. 5B .
  • the option bar 501 shows one or more photographing parameter options, such as filter options, wide-angle options, and focal length options. wait.
  • the electronic device 100 can also receive a sliding operation (such as an upward sliding operation) of the user option bar 501 to display other undisplayed photographing parameter options, such as exposure, aperture, shutter, flash, etc.
  • the following embodiments of the present application take the photographing parameter option as the filter option as an example to illustrate.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as a click operation) for the filter options in the option bar 501 , and responds to the user's input operation. After that, the electronic device 100 changes the display status of more options to The display state is as shown in Figure 5C.
  • the user's input operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303 , where the input operation on the shooting control 303 may also be referred to as operation two.
  • a user's input operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area.
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area.
  • the size of the second area and the first area may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 after the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as a click operation) for the filter option in the option bar 501, the electronic device 100 directly expands the scroll screen, that is, the user does not need to click the shooting control 303. In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic device 100 from shaking during the unfolding process of the scroll screen and affecting the effect of taking photos.
  • the user's input operation for the filter option in the option bar 501 may also be referred to as operation two.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 in the second area of the scroll screen, and displays multiple pictures collected by the camera of the electronic device 100 and processed with different filter effects on the third area of the scroll screen. For example, a picture 502 processed with filter one and a picture 503 processed with filter two are displayed on the third area of the scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 555 as shown in Figure 5E.
  • the prompt information 555 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen and display different filter effect images.
  • the content included in the prompt information 555 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display different filter renderings?"
  • the prompt information 555 also includes controls 505 and 506 .
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click) on the control 505. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 5D.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's upward sliding operation for the third area. In response to the upward sliding operation, the electronic device 100 will display other undisplayed and other filters on the third area. Pictures processed with mirror effects. As shown in FIG. 5G , the electronic device 100 also displays a picture 504 processed by filter three in the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation three, so that the display area of the scroll screen continues to increase. In this way, the enlarged displayable area of the scroll screen includes the fourth area and the fifth area.
  • Figure 5H shows the expanded screen after continued expansion.
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is a fourth area, and the fourth area may be the same as the first area, or may be different from the first area.
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the fifth area, and the area of the fifth area is larger than the area of the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can change the arrangement order of multiple pictures processed with different filter effects.
  • the electronic device 100 can display pictures 502, 503, and 504 at the same time. In this way, it is convenient for users to view multiple pictures processed with different filter effects at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 may not display the camera interface, but display the images captured by the camera in the second area and the third area with different parameters of the same photographing parameters. value One or more pictures processed by the camera, or one or more pictures processed by multiple (at least two) camera parameters.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll as shown in FIG. 5I Screen, the left side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIG. 5I is the second area of the scroll screen, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area of the scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the image 507 processed with filter one on the second area, and displays the image 508 processed with filter two on the third area. In this way, users can intuitively compare two pictures processed with different filter effects.
  • the second area also displays a return control 530.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive a trigger operation (such as a click) for the return control 530.
  • a trigger operation such as a click
  • the electronic device 100 will The camera interface 306 is displayed on the second area, and the picture 507 and the picture 508 are displayed on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to displaying two pictures processed with different filter effects at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 can also display two or more pictures processed with different filter effects simultaneously on the display area of the scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's left/right movement operation on the dividing line 307 to change the size of the picture 507 and the picture 508 .
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 307 to the left, and the display area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a seventh area and an eighth area.
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the seventh area
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the eighth area
  • the size of the seventh area is smaller than the size of the second area
  • the size of the eighth area is larger than The size of the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the image 507 processed with filter one on the seventh area, and displays the image 508 processed with filter two on the eighth area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 307 to the right, and the display area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the ninth domain and the tenth domain.
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the ninth area
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the tenth area.
  • the size of the ninth area is larger than the size of the second area
  • the size of the tenth area is smaller than the size of the second area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the image 507 processed with filter one on the ninth area, and displays the image 508 processed with filter two on the tenth area.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation, and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may switch the display positions of the picture 507 and the picture 508 on the scroll screen.
  • the input operation may be that the user's index finger touches the picture 508, his thumb touches the picture 507, and then the two fingers slide in a direction toward each other.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a picture 508 on the left side of the dividing line 307 and a picture 507 on the right side of the dividing line 307 .
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first camera interface on the second area, and displays the images collected by the camera processed with different parameter values of the same photography parameter on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's operation in the third area and change the display size of one or more pictures in the third area. For example, as shown in Figure 5P, pictures 502, 503 and dividing lines 510 are displayed on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 510 upward. As shown in FIG. 5R , the electronic device 100 will reduce the size of the picture 502 and expand the size of the picture 503 . Similarly, as shown in FIG. 5S , the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 510 downward. As shown in FIG. 5T , the electronic device 100 will expand the size of the picture 502 and reduce the size of the picture 503 . In this way, the electronic device 100 can dynamically adjust the size of the picture 502 and the picture 503.
  • one or more pictures displayed in the third area or the fifth area can receive the user's operation 4 to select one or more pictures in the third area or the fifth area and save them in the album, or Delete or share one or more pictures in the third or fifth area to other applications.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation on the picture 504 (such as a long press operation), and the electronic device 100 saves the picture 504 to the gallery.
  • the electronic device 100 can display prompt information 505, and the prompt information 505 can be "The picture has been saved to the gallery!.
  • the prompt information 505 is used to prompt the user that the gallery has been saved to the gallery.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive user operations, select multiple pictures at the same time, and save the selected multiple pictures to the gallery.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first camera interface in the second area, and displays the picture captured by the camera in full screen in the third area and processes it with different parameter values of the same photography parameters.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation in the third area and switch pictures with other filter effects displayed on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll as shown in FIG. 5W Screen, the left side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIG. 5W is the second area of the scroll screen, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area of the scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 in the second area, and displays the picture 502 processed with filter one in full screen in the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive a left and right sliding operation on the third area to switch and display pictures processed by the electronic device 100 with other filter effects.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's left sliding operation on the picture 502 , and in response to the left sliding operation, the electronic device 100 displays on the third area a filter as shown in FIG. 5X Picture 503 processed by Mirror 2.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's rightward sliding operation on the picture 502, and in response to the leftward sliding operation, the electronic device 100 displays the picture processed with filter three on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's rightward sliding operation on the picture 502, and in response to the leftward sliding operation, the electronic device 100 displays the picture processed with filter three on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state, and the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area.
  • the scroll screen has not been unfolded, and the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation.
  • the first camera interface is displayed in an area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area and display the gallery interface in the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can display the camera interface and the gallery interface simultaneously.
  • 6A-6E exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 simultaneously displays a camera interface and a gallery interface.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (eg, click) on the thumbnail display area 304 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 302 on the second area and the gallery interface 601 on the third area.
  • the gallery interface 601 displays thumbnails of multiple different classified photos. For example, thumbnails of all photos, there are a total of 2160 photos under all photo categories. Thumbnails of videos. There are 4 videos in total under the video category. Thumbnails of camera photos.
  • Thumbnails of burst photos There are 2 photos under the burst photo category.
  • Thumbnails of WeChat photos There are 2 photos under the WeChat photo category.
  • Thumbnails of Weibo photos There are 172 photos in total under the Weibo photo category.
  • the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 602 as shown in FIG. 6C , where the prompt information 602 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen.
  • the content of the prompt information 602 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display the gallery interface?".
  • the prompt information 602 also includes a control 603 and a control 604.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click) on the control 603, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display an interface as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user operation to switch the positions of the camera interface and the gallery interface on the scroll screen.
  • the input operation may be that the user's index finger touches the gallery interface 601 , the thumb touches the camera interface 302 , and then the two fingers slide in a direction toward each other.
  • the electronic device 100 switches the display positions of the gallery interface 601 and the camera interface 302.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the gallery interface 601 on the left side of the dividing line 307 and the camera interface 302 on the right side of the dividing line 307 .
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2.
  • the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface on the second area, and display the enlarged target object on the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 enlarges and displays the target object in the picture captured by the camera in the camera interface, so that the user can clearly view the target object.
  • FIG. 7A-7H exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying an enlarged target object on a scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 302 , and a picture 306 collected by the camera is displayed in the camera interface 302 .
  • the picture 306 includes multiple different types of target objects.
  • the target object may be an animal (such as a bird). ), buildings (such as Ferris wheel), scenery (such as the sun and clouds), etc.
  • the user cannot clearly see the specific target object in the picture 306.
  • FIG. 7A In order to allow the user to more clearly observe the target object in the screen 306, as shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's selection operation (such as sliding to delineate the area) of the display area where the target object is located, and respond to the user's trigger In operation, the electronic device 100 pops up a frame to display the target object in the display area selected by the user. As shown in FIG. 7B , the electronic device 100 displays the target object selected by the user in the window 701 . Window 701 displays a complete image of the target object.
  • the user's selection operation such as sliding to delineate the area
  • the electronic device 100 pops up a frame to display the target object in the display area selected by the user.
  • FIG. 7B the electronic device 100 displays the target object selected by the user in the window 701 .
  • Window 701 displays a complete image of the target object.
  • the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 702 as shown in FIG. 7C.
  • the prompt information 702 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen.
  • the content of the prompt information 702 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display the target object?".
  • the prompt information 702 also includes a control 703 and a control 704.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the control 703. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 7D.
  • the electronic device 100 may not display the prompt information 702, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 on the second area, and on the third area Interface 705 is displayed on the area.
  • the target object selected by the user is displayed on the interface 705, and the target object in the interface 705 is magnified by 2 times compared with the target object in the screen 306.
  • the magnification factor is also displayed below the target object in the interface 705, such as "X2".
  • electronic The device 100 may not display the magnification of the target object, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can continuously display a mark on the camera interface 302, and the mark is used to prompt the user of the area where the selected target object is located.
  • the partially enlarged image of the target object displayed in the window changes.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation of selecting the display area where the target object is located (such as sliding to delineate the area).
  • the electronic device 100 displays the target selected by the user in a pop-up box.
  • Object as shown in FIG. 7E , the electronic device 100 displays a partially enlarged image of the target object selected by the user in the window 707 .
  • Window 707 displays an enlarged image of the "wings" portion of the target object.
  • the user can move the finger, and the image of the target object displayed in the window 707 moves as the user moves the finger.
  • the electronic device 100 displays an enlarged image of the "head" region of the target object in the window 707 .
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 on the second area, and on the third area Interface 708 is displayed on the area. Among them, an enlarged image of the "wings" part of the target object selected by the user is displayed on the interface 708, and the enlarged image of the "head” part of the target object in the interface 708 is compared with the "head” part of the target object in the screen 306. "The image of the part is magnified by 2 times, and the magnification factor is also displayed below the target object in the interface 708, such as "X2".
  • the electronic device 100 may not display the magnification of the target object, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may also receive user operations to change the magnification of the target object.
  • Method 1 The electronic device 100 continues to expand the scroll screen based on the user's gesture 1.
  • the magnification factor of the target object also increases with the expansion of the scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 can also shrink the scroll screen based on the user's gesture 2.
  • the magnification factor of the target object also becomes smaller as the screen of the scroll screen shrinks.
  • the user's gestures include but are not limited to: sliding gestures acting on the display screen (such as two-finger sliding gestures or three-finger sliding gestures), click gestures, tapping gestures, operations of hardware on the electronic device 100, etc.
  • the second gesture of the user includes but is not limited to: sliding gestures acting on the display screen (such as two-finger sliding gestures or three-finger sliding gestures), click gestures, tapping gestures, operations of hardware on the electronic device 100 , etc.
  • gesture one and gesture two are different.
  • Method 2 In addition to displaying the enlarged image of the target object in the third area, the electronic device 100 can also display a zoom-in/zoom-out control. The electronic device 100 can change the magnification factor of the target object based on the user's input operation on the zoom-in/zoom-out control.
  • the electronic device 100 also displays zoom-in/zoom-out controls on the interface 705, such as controls 709, controls 710, controls 711, and controls 712.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 709 and reduce the magnification of the target object from 2 times to 1 time.
  • the image size of the target object displayed on the interface 705 will also be reduced.
  • the size of the scroll screen can also be reduced as the image of the target object displayed on the interface 705 is reduced.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 710 and expand the magnification of the target object from 2 times to 4 times.
  • the image size of the target object displayed on the interface 705 will also be expanded.
  • the size of the scroll screen can also be expanded as the image of the target object displayed on the interface 705 expands.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 711 and expand the magnification of the target object from 4 times to 6 times.
  • the image size of the target object displayed on the interface 705 will also be expanded.
  • scroll screen size It may also be expanded as the image of the target object displayed on the interface 705 is expanded.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 712 to select other magnification or reduction factors.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive a user's input operation on the control 710.
  • the electronic device 100 expands the magnification of the target object from 2 times to 4 times, and displays the enlarged image of the target object. Displayed on scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation on the control 710 and continue to expand the scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the interface 714 on the right side of the dividing line 307 , and the area of the display area where the interface 714 is located is larger than the area of the display area where the interface 705 is located.
  • the interface 714 displays an image of the target object with a magnification factor of 4 times, and the interface 714 also displays zoom-in/zoom-out controls, such as controls 709, 713, 711, and 712.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2.
  • the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area, and display detailed information of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the detailed information of the recognized target object on the scroll screen, so that the user can view the detailed information of the target object.
  • the detailed information of the target object includes but is not limited to: the name of the target object, the characteristics of the target object, the habits of the target object, other objects similar to the target, etc.
  • 8A to 8F exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 displays detailed information of a recognized target object on a scroll screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 801.
  • the area where the camera interface 801 is located is the first area.
  • the camera interface 801 may also be called the first camera interface.
  • the camera interface 801 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 802.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the image captured by the camera in the thumbnail display area 304 .
  • an input operation eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 801 in the second area, and display detailed information of the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area.
  • Operation two may also be a user input operation on screen 802.
  • the second operation may be a long press operation by the user on the display area where the target object (eg, pet dog) in the screen 802 is located.
  • the second operation may also be the user's sliding operation on the display area where the target object (such as a pet dog) in the screen 802 is located. The user's sliding operation is used to circle the target object in the screen 802 in the display area.
  • Operation 2 may also be other operations, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the electronic device 100 may not receive user operations, but may automatically recognize the target object in the screen 802 based on an image recognition algorithm.
  • the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display detailed information of multiple different target objects on the third area at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can give prompt information to allow the user to select one or more target objects among the multiple different target objects, and prompt the user to select the target object.
  • one of Detailed information of one or more target objects is displayed on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 804 as shown in FIG. 8C.
  • Information 804 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen.
  • the prompt content in the prompt information 804 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display the target object?".
  • the prompt information 804 also includes controls 805 and 806 .
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input operation on the control 805. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 8D.
  • the display area of the electronic device 100 on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the interface 801 on the second area.
  • Interface 807 is displayed on the three areas. Among them, the image of the target object and the name of the target object (for example, "Type A dog") are displayed in the interface 807 .
  • the electronic device 100 in addition to displaying the image and name of the target object on the interface 807, can also display profile information of the target object on the interface 807.
  • the profile information can be " AAAAAABBBBBBCCCCCDDDDDEEEEEEEFFFFFFGGGGGGGHHHHH”.
  • the electronic device 100 in addition to displaying the image and name of the target object on the interface 807 , can also display the images and names of other similar target objects on the interface 807 .
  • the image and name of "Type B dog” are similar to “Type A dog”
  • the image and name of "Type C dog” are similar to "Type A dog”.
  • the electronic device 100 can simultaneously display the image of the target object, the name of the target object, the profile information of the target object, the images and names of other target objects similar to the target object, etc. on the interface 807.
  • This application implements The examples are not limited here.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2.
  • the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area, and display the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation to switch the background effect of the target object displayed on the third area.
  • 9A-9G exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 switching a target object.
  • FIGS. 9A-9C exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 switching a target object.
  • the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 901.
  • the area where the camera interface 901 is located is the first area.
  • the camera interface 901 may also be called the first camera interface.
  • the camera interface 901 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc.
  • the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 902.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the image captured by the camera in the thumbnail display area 304 .
  • an input operation eg, click
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 901 on the second area, and display the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 on the third area.
  • the second operation is to make the electronic device 100 unfold the scroll screen.
  • the second operation may specifically be a sliding gesture (such as a two-finger sliding gesture or a three-finger sliding gesture), a clicking gesture, a tapping gesture, or a sliding gesture acting on the display screen. Operation of hardware on the electronic device 100, etc.
  • the display area to the left of the dividing line 903 and above the dividing line 904 is the second area, and the display area to the right of the dividing line 903 and above the dividing line 904 is the third area. area, the display area below the dividing line 904 may be called an eleventh area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the screen 902 and setting controls on the second area, and displays the picture 905 of the target object in the screen 902 recognized by the electronic device 100 on the third area.
  • the picture 905 only includes the image of the target object.
  • the electronic device 100 displays controls in the camera interface 901 in the eleventh area, such as shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video options, professional options, more options), etc.
  • Switching background controls are also displayed on the second area and the third area, such as control 906, control 907, control 908, control 909, and control 910.
  • the picture 905 displayed on the second area has no background effect, then the electronic device 100 can highlight the control 906 (for example, darken the display area where the control 906 is located).
  • the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display images of multiple different target objects on the third area at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can give prompt information to allow the user to select one or more target objects among the multiple different target objects, and prompt the user to select the target object. Images of one or more target objects are displayed on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (for example, click) on the control 907 , and in response to the user's input operation, as shown in FIG. 9C , the electronic device 100 adds a background on the third area.
  • the first display effect the third area displays picture 911.
  • the electronic device 100 can highlight the control 907 (for example, darken the display area where the control 907 is located). In this way, the electronic device 100 can change the background effect of the target object and improve the photographing experience.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the background-changed picture displayed in the third area to the album.
  • a user's input operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on the picture 911, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 911 to the album.
  • a user's input operation such as a long press operation
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 911 to the gallery.
  • the electronic device can change the display form of the thumbnail display area 304, as shown in Figure 9D.
  • 9E to 9G exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of another electronic device 100 switching a target object.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 901 on the second area, and display the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 on the third area.
  • the display area to the left of the dividing line 903 is the second area
  • the display area to the right of the dividing line 903 is the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 901 in the second area, and displays the picture 912 of the target object in the screen 902 recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area.
  • the picture 912 only includes the image of the target object.
  • the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display images of multiple different target objects on the third area at the same time.
  • the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can give prompt information to allow the user to select one or more target objects among the multiple different target objects, and prompt the user to select the target object. Images of one or more target objects are displayed on the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (for example, click) on the control 907 , and in response to the user's input operation, as shown in FIG. 9F , the electronic device 100 adds a background on the third area.
  • the first display effect, the third area displays picture 913.
  • the electronic device 100 can highlight the control 907 (for example, darken the display area where the control 907 is located). In this way, the electronic device 100 can change the background effect of the target object and improve the photographing experience.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the background-changed picture displayed in the third area to the album.
  • a user's input operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on the picture 913, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 913 to the album.
  • a user's input operation such as a long press operation
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 913 to the gallery.
  • the electronic device 100 can change the display form of the thumbnail display area 304, as shown in FIG. 9G.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2.
  • the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area, and display pictures of different sizes captured by the camera of the electronic device 100 in the third area.
  • the pictures of different sizes may be preset sizes, or the electronic device 100 may output prompt information to prompt the user to select different sizes, and display pictures of the size selected by the user.
  • FIG. 10A schematically illustrates a background diagram in which the electronic device 100 displays pictures of different sizes.
  • the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 302, a picture 306 is displayed in the camera interface 302, and the display area where the camera interface 302 is located is the first area.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, and the display area of the scroll screen includes a second area and a third area.
  • the second operation is to make the electronic device 100 unfold the scroll screen.
  • the second operation may specifically be a sliding gesture (such as a two-finger sliding gesture or a three-finger sliding gesture), a clicking gesture, a tapping gesture, or a sliding gesture acting on the display screen. Operation of hardware on the electronic device 100, etc.
  • operation two may also be an input operation (for example, click) on the shooting control 303 .
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 on the second area, and displays the picture 1001 and the picture 1002 on the third area. Among them, the sizes of picture 1001 and picture 1002 are different.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to displaying two pictures of different sizes in the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can also display multiple (for example, three or four) pictures of different sizes in the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can continue to receive user operations so that the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 continues to expand. Since the display area of the scroll screen becomes larger, the electronic device 100 can display more information in the screen. Many pictures of different sizes.
  • the arrangement and display effect of pictures of different sizes displayed on the scroll screen can also change.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves multiple pictures of different sizes to the album.
  • a user's input operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 can receive a user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on one or more pictures displayed on the third area, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture selected by the user to the album. Save.
  • a user's input operation such as a long press operation
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded.
  • the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2.
  • the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the first camera interface in the second area and display accessories in the third area. The user can move the accessories displayed in the third area to the first camera interface, thereby improving the user's photography effect.
  • 11A-11B exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying accessories.
  • the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 901 .
  • the area where the camera interface 901 is located is the first area.
  • the camera interface 901 may also be called the first camera interface.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation. In response to the user's second operation, the electronic device 100 expands the expansion screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 11A .
  • the display area on the left side of the dividing line 903 is the second area
  • the display area on the right side of the dividing line 904 is the third area.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 901 on the third area, and displays one or more types of accessories on the third area. For example, hat accessories, scarf accessories, jewelry accessories, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's sliding operation (eg, an upward sliding operation) on the third area, and in response to the user's sliding operation, the electronic device 100 will display other undisplayed matching pieces on the third area.
  • a user's sliding operation eg, an upward sliding operation
  • an accessory 904 is displayed on the third area, and the accessory 904 is a word art accessory.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as long press and drag operation) on the accessory 904.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the accessory 904 in the camera interface 901.
  • the camera interface 901 Includes screen 903.
  • the difference between the screen 903 shown in FIG. 11B and the screen 902 shown in FIG. 11A is that the screen 903 has an additional accessory 904 .
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input operation on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 903 to the gallery.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the first state, and the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area.
  • the scroll screen has not been unfolded, and the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation.
  • the first area displays the first camera interface.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the first camera interface on the second area, and display a picture editing page on the third area.
  • the picture editing page includes pictures collected by the camera and a plurality of editing controls.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive user input operations on multiple editing controls on the camera editing page, so that the user can edit the images captured by the camera, such as adding filters, using special effects (such as "slimming" special effects), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation on the shooting control, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the user-edited picture displayed in the third area to the photo album.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the photographing page while editing the pictures displayed in the photographing page, thereby improving the user's photographing experience.
  • each of the above embodiments may also be applied to a folding screen.
  • FIG. 12A exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the shape of an inward-folding folding screen.
  • the inward-folding folding screen can fold the A screen and the B screen in the direction of each other along the folding edge to form the A screen and the B screen in the semi-folded form as shown in Figure 12B.
  • the folding screen in the semi-folded form can continue to fold the A screen and the B screen in the direction of each other along the folding edge to form the fully unfolded A screen and B screen as shown in Figure 12C.
  • screen A or screen B when the folding screen is not unfolded, screen A or screen B may also be called the first display area.
  • the display area where the A screen is located may be called the second display area or the fourth display area.
  • the display area where screen B is located may be called the third display area or the fifth display area.
  • the shooting method applied to the scroll screen provided in the above embodiment is also applicable to the folding screen.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a shooting method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method is applied to an electronic device including a scroll screen.
  • the scroll screen includes a first state and a second state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen includes the first area.
  • the scroll screen The displayable area includes a second area and a third area; the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the first state.
  • the electronic device displays a first camera interface in the first area.
  • the first camera interface includes images collected in real time by the first camera in the first shooting mode and first shooting controls.
  • the electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state.
  • the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area.
  • the first camera interface and the second interface are different.
  • the first area may be the display area where the camera interface 302 in FIG. 4B is located.
  • the first camera interface may be camera interface 302 shown in Figure 4B.
  • the first photographing mode may be the photographing mode shown in FIG. 4B.
  • the picture captured by the first camera in real time is picture 306 in Figure 4B.
  • the first shooting control may be the shooting control 303 shown in FIG. 4B.
  • the second interface is any one of the following: a gallery interface, a second camera interface, a picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect, or a target object image in the picture collected in real time by the first camera.
  • the second interface is a picture collected by the first camera in real time processed with the first effect, and the first effect is a filter effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figure 5A to Figure 5X.
  • the second interface can It is the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIGS. 5A to 5X.
  • the first effect is a background effect
  • FIGS. 9A-9G The second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 903 shown in FIGS. 9A-9G.
  • the first effect is a size effect
  • the second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in Figure 10A.
  • the second interface is the target object image in the screen collected in real time by the first camera, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figures 7A to 7H and Figure 8A to 8F.
  • the second interface can be as shown in Figures 7A to 7H.
  • the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 is shown.
  • the second interface may also be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F .
  • the second interface when the second interface is the second camera interface, that is, the electronic device can display two camera interfaces at the same time.
  • the second camera interface includes images captured by the second camera in real time in the second shooting mode.
  • the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode, and the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode and the second shooting control.
  • the second camera interface may be the camera interface 311 shown in FIG. 4D, or the camera interface 311 shown in FIG. 4F, or the camera interface 311 shown in FIG. 4G.
  • the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect may also be called a first picture.
  • the picture effect of the first picture is different from the picture effect of the picture collected in real time by the first camera.
  • the first effect includes any of the following: filter effect, background effect, size effect, resolution effect, and clarity effect.
  • the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are the same or different, and the first camera and the second camera are different.
  • the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display different cameras and use the same or different shooting modes to collect images.
  • the first camera is a front-facing camera and the second camera is a rear-facing camera.
  • the first camera is the main camera among the rear cameras, and the second camera is the wide-angle camera among the rear cameras.
  • the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are different, and the first camera and the second camera are the same.
  • the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display the same camera and use different shooting modes to collect images.
  • the first camera and the second camera are both rear-facing and front-facing cameras
  • the first shooting mode is the first filter
  • the second shooting mode is the second filter.
  • the user can display images processed by different filter effects on the first camera interface and the second camera interface respectively, so that the user can compare and select a filter with better photo effects for taking photos.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device detects a second operation on the first shooting control, and saves the image captured by the first camera in the first shooting mode to the photo album.
  • the electronic device detects the third operation on the second shooting control, and saves the image captured by the second camera in the second shooting mode to the photo album. In this way, the user can respectively control saving the images displayed in the first camera interface or the second camera interface to the photo album.
  • Shooting modes include any of the following: night scene mode, portrait mode, large aperture mode, photo mode, video mode, professional mode, time-lapse mode, different focal length modes, and different wide-angle modes.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the fourth operation, and in the second area and A third camera interface is jointly displayed on the third area.
  • the third camera interface includes real-time images collected by the first camera in the first shooting mode and the first shooting control.
  • the third camera interface includes the second camera in the second shooting mode. Click the real-time captured image and the second shooting control.
  • the user can operate the electronic device to display only any one of the above camera interfaces, so that the display area of the one camera interface becomes larger and richer images can be collected.
  • the third interface may be the camera interface 317 shown in FIG. 4N.
  • the camera interface 317 may be an enlarged interface of the camera interface 302, or the camera interface 317 may also be an enlarged interface of the camera interface 308.
  • the second camera interface also includes a camera switching control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device receives And in response to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area.
  • the fourth camera interface includes the images collected by the third camera in real time in the second shooting mode, or includes the images captured by the third camera in the second shooting mode. Real-time captured footage and secondary shooting controls in shooting mode. In this way, the electronic device can switch to display images collected by different cameras.
  • the camera switching control can be the front/rear camera switching control 313 shown in Figure 4H
  • the fourth camera interface can be the camera interface 308 shown in Figure 4K
  • the real-time captured images of the third camera in the second shooting mode can be In the screen 315 shown in FIG. 4K
  • the second shooting control may be the shooting control 310 shown in FIG. 4K.
  • the camera interface 308 may also include only Screen 315, optionally, the camera interface 308 may also only include the screen 315 and the shooting control 310.
  • the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, and the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area, specifically including: the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control.
  • the fifth operation is to output the first prompt information; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area.
  • the prompt information is used to prompt the user to switch the displayed image collected by which camera.
  • the first prompt information may be prompt information 333 shown in Figure 4I.
  • the electronic device while the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device also displays the first control; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device displays the first control in the third area.
  • the fourth camera interface specifically includes: after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device receives and responds to the trigger operation for the first control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area. This way, the user can choose which camera to switch to.
  • the first control is the "wide angle" control shown in Figure 4J.
  • the second camera interface further includes a third mode selection control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device Receive and respond to the sixth operation of the third mode selection control, and the electronic device displays a fifth camera interface in the third area.
  • the fifth camera interface includes images captured by the second camera in real time in the third shooting mode, or includes the second camera. Real-time captured footage and secondary shooting controls in third shooting mode. In this way, the electronic device can receive a user's operation to switch between different photographing modes, for example, switching from photographing mode to video recording mode.
  • the third mode selection control may be the "recording" mode control shown in Figure 4L.
  • the fifth camera interface may be the screen in the camera interface 308 shown in FIG. 4M.
  • the electronic device displays the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, and at the same time displays the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect in the third area. ; Among them, the first effect and the second effect are different.
  • the picture captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect may also be called the second picture.
  • the electronic device can simultaneously display multiple pictures processed with different picture effects in the third area, so that the user can compare the pictures processed with different picture effects.
  • the second interface is a picture collected by the first camera in real time processed with the first effect, and the first effect is a filter effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figure 5A to Figure 5X.
  • the second interface can It is the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in Figures 5A to 5X.
  • the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect can be the picture 502 processed with filter one shown in Figure 5D, with the first effect
  • the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed by the second effect may be the picture 503 processed by the second filter as shown in FIG. 5D.
  • the first effect is a background effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 9A-9G.
  • the second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 903 shown in FIGS. 9A-9G.
  • the second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in Figure 10A.
  • the second interface is the target object image in the screen collected in real time by the first camera, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figures 7A to 7H and Figure 8A to 8F.
  • the second interface can be as shown in Figures 7A to 7H.
  • the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 is shown.
  • the second interface may also be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F .
  • the scroll screen also includes a third state.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a fourth area and a fifth area.
  • the displayable area of the scroll screen The area is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state; after the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state, the method also includes: the electronic device receives the third Seven operations; in response to the seventh operation, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the third state; while the scroll screen is in the third state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the fourth area and displays the first effect in the fifth area.
  • the images captured by the first camera in real time are processed and the images captured by the first camera in real time are processed with the second effect; wherein the first effect and the second effect are different.
  • the electronic device can display other effect-processed images after the scroll screen continues to expand.
  • the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect may be the picture 502 processed by filter one as shown in Figure 5H
  • the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect may be the picture shown in Figure 5H Image 503 obtained by applying filter 2.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives an eighth operation for the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the eighth operation, the electronic device uses the first effect processed with the The images captured by the first camera in real time are saved to the photo album.
  • the electronic device receives an eighth operation for the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the eighth operation, the electronic device uses the first effect processed with the The images captured by the first camera in real time are saved to the photo album.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives a ninth operation for the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the ninth operation, the electronic device stops displaying the image processed with the first effect The first camera captures the picture in real time. That is, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to delete the images collected by the first camera in real time and processed with the first effect.
  • the method also includes: the electronic device receives the tenth operation; in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays the picture collected by the first camera in real time in the second area and processed with the first effect in the third area.
  • the screen captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect is displayed on the screen.
  • the electronic device does not display the camera interface, but displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect and the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the second effect in full screen.
  • FIG. 5I refers the embodiment shown in FIG. 5I.
  • the electronic device displays the image captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect in the second area, and displays the image captured in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect in the third area.
  • the method also includes: the electronic device receives an eleventh operation; in response to the eleventh operation, the electronic device adjusts the size of the second area and the third area, and the displayable area of the scroll screen remains unchanged in the second state. In this way, the electronic device can adjust the size of the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the third effect and the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed by the second effect.
  • FIGS. 5J to 5M and 5P to 5T are examples of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 5J to 5M and 5P to 5T.
  • the electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state, which specifically includes: the electronic device receives the first operation and outputs the second prompt information; the electronic device outputs the second prompt information. After receiving the message, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state. In this way, the user's misoperation is prevented from causing the electronic device to unfold the scroll screen. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in Figure 5E.
  • the method further includes: the electronic device receives a twelfth operation; responds to the twelfth operation , the electronic device displays the second interface in the second area, and displays the first camera interface in the third area.
  • the electronic device can receive the user's operation to switch the display position of the interface in the second area and the third area.
  • FIGS. 5N to 5O the embodiments shown in FIGS. 5N to 5O.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.

Abstract

The present application provides a photographing method and an electronic device, which are applied to an electronic device comprising a reel screen, wherein the reel screen comprises a first state and a second state. In the first state, the electronic device displays a first camera interface in a first region, wherein the first camera interface comprises a picture acquired in real time by a first camera in a first photographing mode and a first photographing control; the electronic device receives a first operation and unfolds the reel screen to the second state; and in the second state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in a second region and displays a second interface in a third region, a first interface being different from a second camera interface, and the second interface being any one of the following: a gallery interface, the second camera interface, the picture acquired in real time by the first camera and processed by a first effect, and a target object image in the picture acquired in real time by the first camera. According to the method, the photographing diversity of a reel screen mobile phone is achieved, and the photographing experience of a user is improved.

Description

一种拍摄方法及电子设备Photography method and electronic equipment
本申请要求于2022年03月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210326148.9、申请名称为“一种拍摄方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the China Patent Office on March 30, 2022, with the application number 202210326148.9 and the application title "A Photography Method and Electronic Equipment", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference. .
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种拍摄方法及电子设备。The present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular, to a photographing method and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
随着技术的演进,手机的形态也逐渐多样化,而保证手机体积尽可能小而手机显示屏不断扩大的理念成为一种主流,因而也逐渐出现了折叠屏、卷轴屏等新的手机形态。从用户体验角度来看,智能手机的拍摄功能无疑是一个重要特性,如何更好地利用新的手机形态的特点,充分利用扩大的屏幕尺寸,丰富和提升用户的拍摄体验,也将成为新形态智能手机的关键设计。With the evolution of technology, the forms of mobile phones have gradually diversified, and the concept of ensuring that the size of mobile phones is as small as possible while the mobile phone display continues to expand has become a mainstream, so new mobile phone forms such as folding screens and scroll screens have gradually emerged. From the perspective of user experience, the shooting function of a smartphone is undoubtedly an important feature. How to better utilize the characteristics of the new mobile phone form and make full use of the expanded screen size to enrich and enhance the user's shooting experience will also become a new form. Key design of smartphones.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种拍摄方法及电子设备,实现了卷轴屏手机拍照的多样性,提高了用户的拍照体验。This application provides a shooting method and electronic equipment, which realizes the diversity of taking photos with a roll-screen mobile phone and improves the user's photo-taking experience.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种拍摄方法,应用于包括卷轴屏的电子设备,卷轴屏包括第一状态和第二状态,其中,在第一状态下,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,在第二状态下,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域;在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域大于在第一状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域;方法包括:在卷轴屏处于第一状态下,电子设备在所述第一区域显示第一相机界面,第一相机界面包括在第一拍摄模式下通过第一摄像头实时采集的画面和第一拍摄控件;电子设备接收到第一操作,将卷轴屏展开至第二状态;在卷轴屏处于第二状态下,电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面,第一界面和第二相机界面不同。In a first aspect, the present application provides a shooting method, which is applied to an electronic device including a scroll screen. The scroll screen includes a first state and a second state, wherein in the first state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a first state. area, in the second state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes the second area and the third area; the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state is greater than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the first state; the method includes: When the scroll screen is in the first state, the electronic device displays a first camera interface in the first area. The first camera interface includes images collected in real time by the first camera in the first shooting mode and first shooting controls; the electronic device After receiving the first operation, the scroll screen is expanded to the second state; when the scroll screen is in the second state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area, displays the second interface in the third area, and the first interface and the third camera interface are displayed in the third area. The two camera interfaces are different.
其中,第二界面为以下任一一项:图库界面、第二相机界面、以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面、所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面中的目标物体图像。Wherein, the second interface is any one of the following: a gallery interface, a second camera interface, a picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect, or an image of the target object in the picture collected in real time by the first camera. .
其中,当第二界面为第二相机界面时,即电子设备可以同时显示两个相机界面。在一种可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面。在其他可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面,第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。Wherein, when the second interface is the second camera interface, that is, the electronic device can display two camera interfaces at the same time. In a possible implementation, the second camera interface includes images captured by the second camera in real time in the second shooting mode. In other possible implementations, the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode, and the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode and the second shooting control. .
当第二界面为以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面时,以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面也可以被称为第一图片。第一图片的图片效果和第一摄像头实时采集的画面的画面效果不同。第一效果包括以下任一一项:滤镜效果、背景效果、尺寸效果、分辨率效果、清晰度效果。When the second interface is a picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with a first effect, the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect may also be called a first picture. The picture effect of the first picture is different from the picture effect of the picture collected in real time by the first camera. The first effect includes any of the following: filter effect, background effect, size effect, resolution effect, and clarity effect.
通过第一方面提供的方法,实现了卷轴屏手机拍照的多样性,提高了用户的拍照体验。 Through the method provided in the first aspect, the diversity of photography with scroll screen mobile phones is achieved, and the user's photography experience is improved.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一拍摄模式与第二拍摄模式相同或不同,第一摄像头与第二摄像头不同。这样,第一相机界面和第二相机界面可以分别显示不同的摄像头,采用相同或者不同的拍摄模式采集画面,例如第一摄像头为前置摄像头,第二摄像头为后置摄像头。再例如,第一摄像头为后置摄像头中的主摄像头,第二摄像头为后置摄像头中的广角摄像头。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are the same or different, and the first camera and the second camera are different. In this way, the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display different cameras and use the same or different shooting modes to collect images. For example, the first camera is a front-facing camera and the second camera is a rear-facing camera. For another example, the first camera is the main camera among the rear cameras, and the second camera is the wide-angle camera among the rear cameras.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第一拍摄模式与第二拍摄模式不同,第一摄像头与第二摄像头相同。这样,第一相机界面和第二相机界面可以分别显示同一个摄像头,采用不同的拍摄模式采集画面。例如,第一摄像头和第二摄像头均为后置前置摄像头,第一拍摄模式为第一滤镜,第二拍摄模式为第二滤镜。这样,用户可以在自拍时,在第一相机界面和第二相机界面上分别显示不同的滤镜效果处理的画面,以便用户对比选择拍照效果更好的滤镜进行拍照。Combined with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are different, and the first camera and the second camera are the same. In this way, the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display the same camera and use different shooting modes to collect images. For example, the first camera and the second camera are both rear-facing and front-facing cameras, the first shooting mode is the first filter, and the second shooting mode is the second filter. In this way, when taking a selfie, the user can display images processed by different filter effects on the first camera interface and the second camera interface respectively, so that the user can compare and select a filter with better photo effects for taking photos.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:电子设备监测到针对第一拍摄控件的第二操作,将在第一拍摄模式下通过第一摄像头拍摄的画面保存至相册。在其他可能的实现方式中,电子设备监测到针对第二拍摄控件的第三操作,将在第二拍摄模式下通过第二摄像头拍摄的画面保存至相册。这样,用户可以分别控制将第一相机界面或者第二相机界面内显示的画面保存至相册。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the electronic device detects a second operation on the first shooting control, and saves the image captured by the first camera in the first shooting mode to an album. In other possible implementations, the electronic device detects the third operation on the second shooting control, and saves the image captured by the second camera in the second shooting mode to the photo album. In this way, the user can respectively control saving the images displayed in the first camera interface or the second camera interface to the photo album.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,拍摄模式包括以下任意一项:夜景模式、人像模式、大光圈模式、拍照模式、录影模式、专业模式、延时模式、不同的焦距模式、不同的广角模式。Combined with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the shooting mode includes any of the following: night scene mode, portrait mode, large aperture mode, photo mode, video mode, professional mode, time-lapse mode, different focal length mode, Different wide angle modes.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收并响应第四操作,在第二区域和第三区域上共同显示第三相机界面,第三相机界面包括第一摄像头在第一拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第一拍摄控件,或者,第三相机界面包括第二摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。这样,在电子设备显示第一相机界面和第二相机界面后,用户可以操作使得电子设备仅显示上述其中任意一个相机界面,使得该一个相机界面的显示面积变大,可以采集更丰富的画面。In conjunction with the first aspect, in one possible implementation, after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the fourth operation, A third camera interface is jointly displayed on the second area and the third area. The third camera interface includes real-time captured images of the first camera in the first shooting mode and the first shooting control. Alternatively, the third camera interface includes the second camera. Real-time captured footage and secondary shooting controls in the second shooting mode. In this way, after the electronic device displays the first camera interface and the second camera interface, the user can operate the electronic device to display only any one of the above camera interfaces, so that the display area of the one camera interface becomes larger and richer images can be collected.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面还包括摄像头切换控件;在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在述第三区域显示第二界面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收并响应针对摄像头切换控件的第五操作,电子设备在第三区域显示第四相机界面,第四相机界面包括第三摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面,或者包括第三摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。这样,电子设备可以切换显示不同的摄像头采集的画面。Combined with the first aspect, in one possible implementation, the second camera interface further includes a camera switching control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays the second interface in the third area, the method also The method includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area, and the fourth camera interface includes images collected in real time by the third camera in the second shooting mode, or includes a third camera interface. The real-time captured images and second shooting controls of the three cameras in the second shooting mode. In this way, the electronic device can switch to display images collected by different cameras.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备接收并响应针对摄像头切换控件的第五操作,电子设备在所述第三区域显示第四相机界面,具体包括:电子设备接收并响应针对摄像头切换控件的所述第五操作,输出第一提示信息;在电子设备输出第一提示信息后, 电子设备在述第三区域显示第四相机界面。这样,该提示信息用于提示用户,切换显示的是哪一个摄像头采集的画面。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area, specifically including: the electronic device receives and responds For the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the first prompt information is output; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, The electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area. In this way, the prompt information is used to prompt the user to switch the displayed image collected by which camera.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备输出第一提示信息的同时,所述电子设备还显示有第一控件;在电子设备输出所述第一提示信息后,电子设备在第三区域显示第四相机界面,具体包括:在电子设备输出第一提示信息后,电子设备接收并响应针对第一控件的触发操作,电子设备在第三区域显示第四相机界面。这样,用户可以选择切换到哪一个摄像头。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, while the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device also displays the first control; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device Displaying the fourth camera interface in the third area specifically includes: after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device receives and responds to the trigger operation for the first control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area. This way, the user can choose which camera to switch to.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面还包括第三模式选择控件;在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收并响应针对第三模式选择控件的第六操作,电子设备在第三区域显示第五相机界面,第五相机界面包括第二摄像头在第三拍摄模式下实时采集的画面,或者包括第二摄像头在第三拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。这样,电子设备可以接收用户操作切换不同的拍照模式,例如由拍照模式切换为摄像模式。Combined with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the second camera interface further includes a third mode selection control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays the second interface in the third area, the method It also includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the sixth operation of the third mode selection control, the electronic device displays a fifth camera interface in the third area, and the fifth camera interface includes images collected in real time by the second camera in the third shooting mode, Or include real-time images collected by the second camera in the third shooting mode and second shooting controls. In this way, the electronic device can receive a user's operation to switch between different photographing modes, for example, switching from photographing mode to video recording mode.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备在第三区域显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的同时,在第三区域显示以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面;其中,第一效果和第二效果不同。这里,以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面也可以被称为第二图片。这样,电子设备可以在第三区域同时显示多个不同画面效果处理的图片,以便用户对比不同画面效果处理的图片。In conjunction with the first aspect, in one possible implementation, the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, and at the same time displays the first image processed with the second effect in the third area. Pictures collected by the camera in real time; among them, the first effect and the second effect are different. Here, the picture captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect may also be called the second picture. In this way, the electronic device can simultaneously display multiple pictures processed with different picture effects in the third area, so that the user can compare the pictures processed with different picture effects.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,卷轴屏还包括第三状态,在第三状态下,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第四区域和第五区域,在第三状态下所述卷轴屏的可显示区域大于在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域;在电子设备将卷轴屏展开至第二状态之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第七操作;响应于第七操作,电子设备将卷轴屏展开至第三状态;在卷轴屏处于第三状态下,电子设备在第四区域显示第一相机界面,在第五区域显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面;其中,第一效果和第二效果不同。这样,电子设备可以在卷轴屏继续展开后,显示其他效果处理的画面。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the scroll screen further includes a third state. In the third state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a fourth area and a fifth area. In the third state, The displayable area of the scroll screen is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state; after the electronic device unfolds the scroll screen to the second state, the method also includes: the electronic device receives a seventh operation; in response to the seventh operation, the electronic device The device expands the scroll screen to the third state; when the scroll screen is in the third state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the fourth area, and displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the fifth area. Pictures collected in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect; where the first effect and the second effect are different. In this way, the electronic device can display other effect-processed images after the scroll screen continues to expand.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:电子设备接收针对以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的第八操作;响应于第八操作,电子设备将以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面保存至相册。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the electronic device receives an eighth operation for the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the eighth operation, the electronic device uses The real-time captured images of the first camera processed by the first effect are saved to the photo album.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:电子设备接收针对以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的第九操作;响应于第九操作,电子设备停止显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。即电子设备可以接收用户操作删除以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the electronic device receives a ninth operation for the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the ninth operation, the electronic device stops displaying The picture collected by the first camera in real time is processed with the first effect. That is, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to delete the images collected by the first camera in real time and processed with the first effect.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第三区域显示以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的同时,在第三区域显示以第二效果处理的所述第一摄像 头实时采集的画面后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第十操作;响应于第十操作,电子设备在第二区域上显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面,在第三区域上显示以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。这样,电子设备不显示相机界面,全屏显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。In conjunction with the first aspect, in one possible implementation, while the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, the electronic device displays the image processed with the second effect in the third area. of the first camera After the image is captured in real time by the first camera, the method also includes: the electronic device receives a tenth operation; in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays the image captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect on the second area, and in the third area The screen captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect is displayed on the screen. In this way, the electronic device does not display the camera interface, but displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect and the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the second effect in full screen.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第二区域上显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面,在第三区域上显示以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第十一操作;响应于第十一操作,电子设备调整第二区域和第三区域的大小,在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域不变。这样,电子设备可以调整以第以效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的尺寸大小。In conjunction with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the electronic device displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect on the second area, and displays the third image processed with the second effect on the third area. After a camera collects the picture in real time, the method also includes: the electronic device receives an eleventh operation; in response to the eleventh operation, the electronic device adjusts the size of the second area and the third area, and the scroll screen can be displayed in the second state. The area remains unchanged. In this way, the electronic device can adjust the size of the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the third effect and the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed by the second effect.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备接收到第一操作,将卷轴屏展开至第二状态,具体包括:电子设备接收到第一操作,输出第二提示信息;在电子设备输出第二提示信息后,电子设备将卷轴屏展开至第二状态。这样,避免用户误操作使得电子设备展开卷轴屏。Combined with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state, specifically including: the electronic device receives the first operation and outputs the second prompt information; After the device outputs the second prompt information, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state. In this way, the user's misoperation is prevented from causing the electronic device to unfold the scroll screen.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第十二操作;响应于第十二操作,电子设备在第二区域显示第二界面,在第三区域显示第一相机界面。这样,电子设备可以接收用户操作切换第二区域和第三区域上界面的显示位置。In conjunction with the first aspect, in one possible implementation, after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device receives a twelfth operation; responds In the twelfth operation, the electronic device displays the second interface in the second area and the first camera interface in the third area. In this way, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to switch the display position of the interface in the second area and the third area.
第二方面,本申请提供一种电子设备,电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、卷轴屏、一个或多个存储器;其中,卷轴屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,一个或多个处理器调用计算机指令以使得电子设备上述任一方面任一可能的实现方式中提供的一种拍摄方法。In a second aspect, this application provides an electronic device. The electronic device includes: one or more processors, a scroll screen, and one or more memories; wherein the scroll screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors. , one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and one or more processors call the computer instructions to enable a shooting method provided in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects of the electronic device .
第三方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一可能的实现方式中提供的一种拍摄方法。In a third aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device causes the electronic device to execute any of the above aspects provided in any possible implementation manner. A method of photography.
第四方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一可能的实现方式中提供的一种拍摄方法。In a fourth aspect, this application provides a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on an electronic device, it causes the electronic device to execute a photographing method provided in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A-图1C示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100展开扩展屏的示意图;1A-1C exemplarily show a schematic diagram of an electronic device 100 unfolding an expansion screen provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的结构示意图;Figure 2 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的软件结构框图;Figure 3 schematically shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4A-图4P示例性示出了电子设备100同时显示两个相机界面的示意图; 4A-4P exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 displaying two camera interfaces at the same time;
图5A-图5X示例性示出了电子设备100同时显示相机界面和滤镜图片的示意图;5A to 5X exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 simultaneously displaying a camera interface and a filter picture;
图6A-图6E示例性示出了电子设备100同时显示相机界面和图库界面的示意图;6A-6E exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 simultaneously displays a camera interface and a gallery interface;
图7A-图7H示例性示出了电子设备100在卷轴屏上显示放大后的目标物体的示意图;7A-7H exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying an enlarged target object on a scroll screen;
图8A-图8F示例性示出了电子设备100将识别到的目标物体的详情信息显示在卷轴屏的示意图;8A-8F exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 displays the detailed information of the recognized target object on the scroll screen;
图9A-图9G示例性示出了电子设备100切换目标物体的背景示意图;9A-9G exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 switching a target object;
图10A示例性示出了电子设备100显示不同尺寸的图片的背景示意图;FIG. 10A schematically shows a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 displaying pictures of different sizes;
图11A-图11B示例性示出了电子设备100显示配件的示意图;11A-11B exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying accessories;
图12A-图12C示例性示出了折叠屏的三种显示形态的示意图;Figures 12A-12C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of three display forms of the folding screen;
图13示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种拍摄方法的流程示意图。FIG. 13 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a shooting method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise stated, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a way to describe related objects. The association relationship means that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiment of the present application , "plurality" means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms “first” and “second” are used for descriptive purposes only and shall not be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” The meaning is two or more.
本申请以下实施例中的术语“用户界面(user interface,UI)”,是应用程序或操作系统与用户之间进行交互和信息交换的介质接口,它实现信息的内部形式与用户可以接受形式之间的转换。用户界面常用的表现形式是图形用户界面(graphic user interface,GUI),是指采用图形方式显示的与计算机操作相关的用户界面。它可以是在电子设备的显示屏中显示的文本、图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。The term "user interface (UI)" in the following embodiments of this application is a media interface for interaction and information exchange between an application or operating system and a user. It realizes the difference between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to the user. conversion between. The commonly used form of user interface is graphical user interface (GUI), which refers to a user interface related to computer operations that is displayed graphically. It can be text, icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, widgets and other visual interface elements displayed on the display screen of an electronic device.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的分屏显示方法进行详细说明。The split-screen display method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
首先介绍电子设备100上展开到扩展屏的几种方式。First, several methods of expanding the electronic device 100 to the extended screen will be introduced.
图1A-图1C示例性示出了电子设备100展开扩展屏的示意图。1A-1C exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 unfolding the extended screen.
在图1A中的(a)中示出的显示屏为原始屏。原始屏由长为X,宽为Y的显示屏组成。在一些实施例中,图1A中的(a)中示出的卷轴屏的状态也可以称为未展开状态。处于未展开状态的卷轴屏,也可以被称为处于第一状态的卷轴屏,处于第一状态的卷轴屏的可见显示区域包括第一区域。The display screen shown in (a) of FIG. 1A is the original screen. The original screen consists of a display screen with length X and width Y. In some embodiments, the state of the scroll screen shown in (a) of FIG. 1A may also be called an unexpanded state. The scroll screen in the unexpanded state may also be called the scroll screen in the first state, and the visible display area of the scroll screen in the first state includes the first area.
电子设备100接收用户操作,响应于用户操作,电子设备100向右侧展开显示屏,得到图1A中的(b)所示的扩展屏一,扩展屏一位于原始屏的右侧,扩展屏一由长为Z,宽为Y的显示屏组成。图1A中的(b)所示的显示屏由原始屏和扩展屏一组成。The electronic device 100 receives the user's operation. In response to the user's operation, the electronic device 100 unfolds the display screen to the right to obtain the extended screen one shown in (b) in FIG. 1A . The extended screen one is located on the right side of the original screen. It consists of a display screen with length Z and width Y. The display screen shown in (b) in Figure 1A consists of an original screen and an extended screen.
可选的,在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以继续展开显示屏,得到尺寸更大的扩展屏。如图1A中的(b)和(c)所示,电子设备100继续接收用户操作,响应于用户操作,电子设备100向右侧继续展开显示屏,得到图1A中的(c)所示的扩展屏二,扩展屏二位于原始屏的 右侧,扩展屏二由长为W,宽为U的显示屏组成。图1A中的(c)所示的显示屏由原始屏和扩展屏二组成。Optionally, in some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can continue to expand the display screen to obtain a larger extended screen. As shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 1A , the electronic device 100 continues to receive user operations. In response to the user operation, the electronic device 100 continues to unfold the display screen to the right, resulting in the display shown in (c) in FIG. 1A . Extended screen two, extended screen two is located next to the original screen On the right, extended screen two consists of a display screen with a length of W and a width of U. The display screen shown in (c) in Figure 1A consists of an original screen and an extended screen.
在一些实施例中,图1A中的(b)或者图1A中的(c)中示出的卷轴屏的状态也可以称为半展开状态。处于半展开状态的卷轴屏,也可以被称为处于第二状态的卷轴屏,处于第二状态的卷轴屏的可见显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。第二区域可以与第一区域相同,也可以不同。In some embodiments, the state of the scroll screen shown in (b) or (c) of FIG. 1A may also be called a semi-expanded state. The scroll screen in the semi-expanded state may also be called the scroll screen in the second state. The visible display area of the scroll screen in the second state includes the second area and the third area. The second area may be the same as the first area, or may be different.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以继续展开显示屏,得到尺寸更大的扩展屏。如图1A中的(c)和(d)所示,电子设备100继续接收用户操作,响应于用户操作,电子设备100向右侧继续展开显示屏,得到图1A中的(d)所示的扩展屏三,扩展屏三位于原始屏的右侧,扩展屏三由长为W,宽为U的显示屏组成。图1A中的(d)所示的显示屏由原始屏和扩展屏三组成。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can continue to expand the display screen to obtain an expanded screen with a larger size. As shown in (c) and (d) in FIG. 1A , the electronic device 100 continues to receive user operations. In response to the user operation, the electronic device 100 continues to expand the display screen to the right, resulting in the display shown in (d) in FIG. 1A . Extended screen three is located on the right side of the original screen. The extended screen three consists of a display screen with a length of W and a width of U. The display screen shown in (d) in Figure 1A consists of an original screen and an extended screen.
在一些实施例中,图1A中的(d)中示出的卷轴屏的状态也可以称为完全展开状态。处于完全展开状态的卷轴屏,也可以被称为处于第三状态的卷轴屏,处于第三状态的卷轴屏的可见显示区域包括第四区域和第五区域。第四区域可以与第二区域相同,也可以不同。In some embodiments, the state of the scroll screen shown in (d) in FIG. 1A may also be referred to as the fully unfolded state. The scroll screen in the fully unfolded state may also be called the scroll screen in the third state. The visible display area of the scroll screen in the third state includes a fourth area and a fifth area. The fourth area may be the same as the second area, or may be different.
可选的,在一些实施例中,不仅限于展开得到三个不同尺寸的扩展屏,电子设备100可以得到其他更多任意尺寸的扩展屏,本申请后实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, in some embodiments, the electronic device 100 is not limited to expansion to obtain three expansion screens of different sizes. The electronic device 100 can obtain other expansion screens of any size, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
可选的,不仅限于在原始屏的右侧得到扩展屏,电子设备100还可以在原始屏的左侧得到扩展屏,例如图1B中的(a)-图1B中的(d)所示。图1B中的(a)-图1B中的(d)中,电子设备100在原始屏的左侧得到扩展屏的操作方法,与图1A中的(a)-图1A中的(d)中,电子设备100在原始屏的右侧得到扩展屏的操作方法一致,本申请实施例对于如何得到扩展屏的操作方法不再赘述。Optionally, the electronic device 100 is not limited to obtaining an extended screen on the right side of the original screen. The electronic device 100 can also obtain an expanded screen on the left side of the original screen, for example, as shown in (a) to (d) in FIG. 1B . In (a) to (d) in FIG. 1B , the electronic device 100 obtains the operation method of the expanded screen on the left side of the original screen, which is the same as in (a) to (d) in FIG. 1A , the operation method of the electronic device 100 to obtain the extended screen on the right side of the original screen is the same. The embodiment of the present application will not elaborate on the operation method of how to obtain the extended screen.
可选的,在一些实施例中,不仅限于在原始屏的左侧或者右侧得到扩展屏,电子设备100也可以在原始屏的上方或下方得到扩展屏,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, in some embodiments, the electronic device 100 is not limited to having an extended screen on the left or right side of the original screen. The electronic device 100 can also have an extended screen above or below the original screen. This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. .
可选的,在一些实施例中,不仅限于扩展在原始屏的左侧或者右侧得到扩展屏,电子设备100也可以在原始屏的右侧得到扩展屏一,同时,电子设备100还可以在原始屏的左侧得到扩展屏二。如图1C中的(a)-图1C中的(c)所示,首先,电子设备100接收用户操作,响应于用户操作,电子设备100在原始屏的右侧得到图1C中的(b)所示的扩展屏一,扩展屏一位于原始屏的右侧,扩展屏一由长为Z,宽为Y的显示屏组成。图1C中的(b)所示的显示屏由原始屏和扩展屏一组成。之后,如图1C中的(b)和(c)所示,电子设备100继续接收用户操作,响应于用户操作,电子设备100在原始屏的左侧得到扩展屏,得到图1C中的(c)所示的扩展屏二,扩展屏二位于原始屏的左侧,扩展屏二由长为Z,宽为Y的显示屏组成。图1C中的(c)所示的显示屏由原始屏、扩展屏一和扩展屏二组成。Optionally, in some embodiments, the electronic device 100 is not limited to extending to the left or right side of the original screen to obtain an extended screen. The electronic device 100 can also obtain an expanded screen on the right side of the original screen. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also be extended on the right side of the original screen. The left side of the original screen gets expanded screen two. As shown in (a) to (c) in FIG. 1C , first, the electronic device 100 receives a user operation. In response to the user operation, the electronic device 100 obtains (b) in FIG. 1C on the right side of the original screen. The extended screen one shown is located on the right side of the original screen. The extended screen one consists of a display screen with a length of Z and a width of Y. The display screen shown in (b) in Figure 1C consists of an original screen and an extended screen. Afterwards, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 1C , the electronic device 100 continues to receive user operations. In response to the user operation, the electronic device 100 obtains an expanded screen on the left side of the original screen, resulting in (c in FIG. 1C ), the extended screen two is located on the left side of the original screen. The extended screen two consists of a display screen with a length of Z and a width of Y. The display screen shown in (c) in Figure 1C consists of an original screen, an extended screen one and an extended screen two.
在一些实施例中,图1C中的(c)中示出的卷轴屏的状态也可以称为完全展开状态。处于完全展开状态的卷轴屏,也可以被称为处于第三状态的卷轴屏,处于第三状态的卷轴屏的可见显示区域包括第六区域、第七区域和第八区域。第六区域可以与第一区域相同,也可以不同。In some embodiments, the state of the scroll screen shown in (c) in FIG. 1C may also be called a fully unfolded state. The scroll screen in the fully expanded state may also be called the scroll screen in the third state. The visible display area of the scroll screen in the third state includes a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area. The sixth area may be the same as the first area, or may be different.
可选的,图1C中的(b)所示的扩展屏一和图1B中的(c)所示的扩展屏二的尺寸相同。在其他实施例中,图1C中的(b)所示的扩展屏一和图1B中的(c)所示的扩展屏二的尺寸也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, the expansion screen one shown in (b) in FIG. 1C and the expansion screen two shown in (c) in FIG. 1B have the same size. In other embodiments, the expansion screen one shown in (b) in FIG. 1C and the expansion screen two shown in (c) in FIG. 1B may also have different sizes, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选的,在一些实施例中,不仅限于电子设备100同时在原始屏的左侧和原始屏的右侧得到扩展屏,电子设备100也可以同时在原始屏的上方和原始屏的下方得到扩展屏。 Optionally, in some embodiments, the electronic device 100 is not limited to having an expanded screen on the left side of the original screen and the right side of the original screen at the same time. The electronic device 100 can also be expanded above the original screen and below the original screen at the same time. Screen.
上述只是示例性说明了几种得到扩展屏的方式,电子设备100还可以得到其他排列样式的扩展屏,本申请实施例对此不做限定。The above are only illustrative examples of several ways to obtain an extended screen. The electronic device 100 can also obtain extended screens in other arrangements, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
图2示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。FIG. 2 shows a schematic structural diagram of the electronic device 100.
电子设备100可以是大屏、手机、平板电脑、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本,以及蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)设备、可穿戴式设备、车载设备、智能家居设备和/或智慧城市设备等,本申请实施例对该电子设备的具体类型不作特殊限制。The electronic device 100 may be a large screen, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), a netbook, a cellular phone, or a personal digital computer. Assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), augmented reality (AR) device, virtual reality (VR) device, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) device, wearable device, vehicle-mounted device, smart home device and/or smart city equipment, etc. The embodiments of this application do not place special restrictions on the specific types of electronic equipment.
电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, some components may be separated, or some components may be arranged differently. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Among them, different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串 行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial derail clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 . For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 . The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141 也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110. The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, the wireless communication module 160, and the like. The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters. In some other embodiments, power management module 141 It may also be provided in the processor 110. In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号解调以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , demodulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处 理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. GPU is the graphics processing unit The processing microprocessor is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc. Display 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode). emitting diode (AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当显示面板采用OLED、AMOLED、FLED等材料时,上述图2中的显示屏194可以被拉伸或者收缩。上述显示屏194可以被拉伸是指显示屏可以在水平方向由原始尺寸大小扩展至拉伸状态,并可以保持在该拉伸状态,本申请实施例中,原始尺寸的显示屏可以被称为原始屏,在显示屏的原始尺寸上扩展出来的显示屏可以被称为扩展屏。上述显示屏194可以被收缩是指显示屏可以在水平方向由拉伸状态收缩至原始尺寸大小,并可以保持在该原始尺寸。其中,原始屏和扩展屏可以是一块屏幕,也可以是多块屏幕拼凑在一起组合成的显示屏,本申请实施例对此不做限定。In some embodiments of the present application, when the display panel uses OLED, AMOLED, FLED and other materials, the display screen 194 in Figure 2 can be stretched or contracted. The above-mentioned display screen 194 can be stretched means that the display screen can be expanded from the original size to a stretched state in the horizontal direction, and can be maintained in the stretched state. In the embodiment of the present application, the display screen of the original size can be called Original screen, a display screen that is expanded on the original size of the display screen can be called an extended screen. The aforementioned display screen 194 can be contracted means that the display screen can be contracted from a stretched state to its original size in the horizontal direction, and can be maintained at the original size. The original screen and the extended screen may be one screen, or may be a display screen composed of multiple screens put together, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise and brightness. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transmission mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and can continuously learn by itself. Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
内部存储器121可以包括一个或多个随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)和一个或多个非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory,NVM)。The internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (NVM).
随机存取存储器可以包括静态随机存储器(static random-access memory,SRAM)、动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)、同步动态随机存储器(synchronous dynamic random access memory,SDRAM)、双倍资料率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data  rate synchronous dynamic random access memory,DDR SDRAM,例如第五代DDR SDRAM一般称为DDR5SDRAM)等;非易失性存储器可以包括磁盘存储器件、快闪存储器(flash memory)。Random access memory can include static random-access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory, DDR SDRAM, for example, the fifth generation DDR SDRAM is generally called DDR5SDRAM), etc.; non-volatile memory can include disk storage devices and flash memory (flash memory).
快闪存储器按照运作原理划分可以包括NOR FLASH、NAND FLASH、3D NAND FLASH等,按照存储单元电位阶数划分可以包括单阶存储单元(single-level cell,SLC)、多阶存储单元(multi-level cell,MLC)、三阶储存单元(triple-level cell,TLC)、四阶储存单元(quad-level cell,QLC)等,按照存储规范划分可以包括通用闪存存储(英文:universal flash storage,UFS)、嵌入式多媒体存储卡(embedded multi media Card,eMMC)等。Flash memory can be divided according to the operating principle to include NOR FLASH, NAND FLASH, 3D NAND FLASH, etc. According to the storage unit potential level, it can include single-level storage cells (single-level cell, SLC), multi-level storage cells (multi-level cell, MLC), third-level storage unit (triple-level cell, TLC), fourth-level storage unit (quad-level cell, QLC), etc., which can include universal flash storage (English: universal flash storage, UFS) according to storage specifications. , embedded multi media card (embedded multi media Card, eMMC), etc.
随机存取存储器可以由处理器110直接进行读写,可以用于存储操作系统或其他正在运行中的程序的可执行程序(例如机器指令),还可以用于存储用户及应用程序的数据等。The random access memory can be directly read and written by the processor 110, can be used to store executable programs (such as machine instructions) of the operating system or other running programs, and can also be used to store user and application data, etc.
非易失性存储器也可以存储可执行程序和存储用户及应用程序的数据等,可以提前加载到随机存取存储器中,用于处理器110直接进行读写。The non-volatile memory can also store executable programs and user and application program data, etc., and can be loaded into the random access memory in advance for direct reading and writing by the processor 110.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部的非易失性存储器,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部的非易失性存储器通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部的非易失性存储器中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external non-volatile memory to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 . The external non-volatile memory communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in external non-volatile memory.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。Microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones. The headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作, 可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some embodiments, pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc. A capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations that act on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities, Can correspond to different operating instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect opening and closing of the flip holster. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance. Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸 传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also known as "touch device". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194. The touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type. Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 . In other embodiments, touching The sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 at a location different from that of the display screen 194 .
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc. Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations for different applications (such as taking pictures, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calls and data communications. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本发明实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. This embodiment of the present invention takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
图3是本发明实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。FIG. 3 is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor. The layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime and system libraries, and kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图3所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。As shown in Figure 3, the application package can include camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message and other applications.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图3所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 3, the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏, 锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the display size and determine whether there is a status bar. Lock screen, capture screen and more.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications. Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc. A view system can be used to build applications. The display interface can be composed of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, call status management (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android Runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android Runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。System libraries can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation and the control corresponding to the click operation as a camera application icon control as an example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
下面结合附图,对本申请实施例提供的一种拍摄方法进行介绍。A photographing method provided by an embodiment of the present application will be introduced below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二(第一操作),电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上 显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二相机界面,即电子设备100可以同时显示两个相机界面。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. A camera interface. After that, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation (the first operation), and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may be on the second area The first camera interface is displayed, and the second camera interface is displayed in the third area, that is, the electronic device 100 can display two camera interfaces at the same time.
在一些实施例中,第二相机界面可以是与第一相机界面显示不同的摄像头采集的画面,例如第一相机界面显示后置摄像头采集的画面,第二相机界面显示前置摄像头采集的画面。In some embodiments, the second camera interface may display images captured by a different camera than the first camera interface. For example, the first camera interface displays images captured by a rear camera, and the second camera interface displays images captured by a front camera.
在一些实施例中,第二相机界面可以与第一相机界面显示相同的摄像头采用不同的拍照参数采集的画面。拍照参数包括但不仅限于:滤镜、广角、焦距、曝光、光圈、快门、闪光灯等。In some embodiments, the second camera interface may display images collected by the same camera using different photographing parameters as the first camera interface. Photography parameters include but are not limited to: filter, wide angle, focal length, exposure, aperture, shutter, flash, etc.
例如,第二相机界面可以与第一相机界面均为后置摄像头采集的画面,但是第二相机界面显示的是后置摄像头中的主摄摄像头采集的画面,第一相机界面显示的是后置摄像头中的广角摄像头采集的画面。For example, the second camera interface and the first camera interface can both display images captured by the rear camera, but the second camera interface displays images captured by the main camera among the rear cameras, while the first camera interface displays images captured by the rear camera. Picture captured by the wide-angle camera in the camera.
图4A-图4P示例性示出了电子设备100同时显示两个相机界面的示意图。4A-4P exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying two camera interfaces at the same time.
如图4A所示,电子设备100上可以显示有主屏幕的界面301,该界面301中显示了一个放置有应用图标的页面,该页面包括多个应用图标(例如,天气应用图标、股票应用图标、计算器应用图标、设置应用图标、邮件应用图标、音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、浏览器应用图标、地图应用图标、等等)。多个应用图标下方还显示包括有页面指示符,以表明当前显示的页面与其他页面的位置关系。页面指示符的下方有多个托盘图标(例如拨号应用图标、信息应用图标、联系人应用图标、相机应用图标),托盘图标在页面切换时保持显示。As shown in FIG. 4A , the electronic device 100 may display a home screen interface 301. The interface 301 displays a page with application icons placed thereon. The page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icon, stock application icon). , calculator app icon, settings app icon, mail app icon, music app icon, video app icon, browser app icon, map app icon, etc.). Page indicators are also displayed below multiple application icons to indicate the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages. There are multiple tray icons below the page indicator (such as dialer application icon, message application icon, contact application icon, camera application icon), and the tray icon remains displayed when the page is switched.
电子设备100可以接收到用户作用于相机应用图标的输入操作(例如单击),响应于该输入操作,电子设备100可以显示如图4B所示的相机界面302,相机界面302所在的区域为第一区域。相机界面302中包括有摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件303、略缩图显示区域304、切换前置/后置摄像头控件305、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域用于显示前置摄像头/后置摄像头捕捉到的画面306。电子设备100可以接收对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于该输入操作,电子设备100可以在略缩图显示区域304显示摄像头捕捉到的画面。The electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation (such as clicking) on the camera application icon. In response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 302 as shown in FIG. 4B . The area where the camera interface 302 is located is the third a region. The camera interface 302 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, Recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc., the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 306. The electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the image captured by the camera in the thumbnail display area 304 .
之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作一,如图4B所示,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,电子设备100展开卷轴屏后,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。分割线307左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线307的右侧为第三区域。第二区域与第一区域的尺寸大小可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation one. As shown in FIG. 4B , the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen. After the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area. . The display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area. The size of the second area and the first area may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
电子设备100在卷轴屏的第二区域显示相机界面302,在第三区域也可以显示相机界面308。相机界面308可以仅包括摄像头捕捉画面显示区域和拍摄控件310。The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 in the second area of the scroll screen, and may also display the camera interface 308 in the third area. The camera interface 308 may only include a camera capture screen display area and a shooting control 310 .
在一些实施例中,电子设备100在相机界面308上显示摄像头采集的画面之前,电子设备100可以在相机界面308上显示如图4C所示的提示信息,该提示信息用于提示用户如何提高拍摄效果,提示信息的内容可以是“将手机举高大约20厘米,手机与人脸角度为45度,站在光亮的地方拍照更好看哦”。In some embodiments, before the electronic device 100 displays the images captured by the camera on the camera interface 308, the electronic device 100 can display prompt information as shown in Figure 4C on the camera interface 308. The prompt information is used to prompt the user how to improve shooting. As a result, the content of the prompt message can be "Hold the phone about 20 centimeters, and the angle between the phone and the person's face is 45 degrees. It will be better to take pictures when standing in a bright place."
在一些实施例中,电子设备100在相机界面308上显示摄像头采集的画面之前,电子设备100也可以在相机界面308上显示视频或图片,该视频或图片用于指导用户的拍照姿势,提升拍照效果。In some embodiments, before the electronic device 100 displays the picture captured by the camera on the camera interface 308, the electronic device 100 can also display a video or picture on the camera interface 308. The video or picture is used to guide the user's photography posture and improve photography. Effect.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100在相机界面308上显示摄像头采集的画面之前,可以显示提示信息后,在显示视频或图片,提示信息、视频或图片用于指导用户的拍照姿势,提升拍照效果。 In some embodiments, before displaying the picture captured by the camera on the camera interface 308, the electronic device 100 may display prompt information and then display the video or picture. The prompt information, video or picture is used to guide the user's photography posture and improve the photography effect. .
在一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以不显示提示信息、视频或图片,本申请实施例对此不做限定。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may not display prompt information, videos or pictures, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在一些实施例中,如图4D所示,相机界面308可以仅包括摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件310和设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域显示的是前置摄像头采集的画面311。电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件310的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将在略缩图显示区域304内显示如图4E所示的画面311的略缩图。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 4D , the camera interface 308 may only include the camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 310 and setting controls, etc. The camera capture screen display area displays the screen 311 collected by the front camera. The electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click) on the shooting control 310, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display a thumbnail of the screen 311 as shown in FIG. 4E in the thumbnail display area 304. picture.
在一些实施例中,相机界面308也可以不包括拍摄控件310,即相机界面308仅包括画面311。电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作,分别将画面306和画面311保存至图库。In some embodiments, the camera interface 308 may not include the shooting control 310 , that is, the camera interface 308 only includes the frame 311 . The electronic device 100 can receive the user's input operation on the shooting control 303 and save the picture 306 and the picture 311 to the gallery respectively.
例如,当用户需要将画面306保存至图库时,电子设备100可以先接收用户针对画面306的输入操作(例如长按操作),之后电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将画面306保存至图库。当用户需要将画面311保存至图库时,电子设备100可以先接收用户针对画面311的输入操作(例如长按操作),之后电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将画面311保存至图库。For example, when the user needs to save the picture 306 to the gallery, the electronic device 100 can first receive the user's input operation on the picture 306 (such as a long press operation), and then the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation on the shooting control 303 (such as a click ), in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 306 to the gallery. When the user needs to save the picture 311 to the gallery, the electronic device 100 can first receive the user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on the picture 311, and then the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as a click) on the shooting control 303, In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the screen 311 to the gallery.
在一些实施例中,如图4F所示,相机界面308可以包括摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件310、略缩图显示区域312、切换前置/后置摄像头控件313、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域显示的是前置摄像头采集的画面311。电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件310的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将在略缩图显示区域312内显示画面311的略缩图。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 4F, the camera interface 308 may include a camera capture screen display area, a shooting control 310, a thumbnail display area 312, a front/rear camera switching control 313, and camera setting options (night scene options). , portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc. The camera capture screen display area displays the screen captured by the front camera 311. The electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 310 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display a thumbnail of the screen 311 in the thumbnail display area 312 .
在一些实施例中,如图4G所示,相机界面308可以包括摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件310、略缩图显示区域312、切换前置/后置摄像头控件313、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域显示的是前置摄像头采集的画面311。电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件310的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将在略缩图显示区域312内显示画面311的略缩图。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 4G, the camera interface 308 may include a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 310, thumbnail display area 312, front/rear camera switching control 313, setting controls, etc., camera capture The screen display area displays the screen 311 collected by the front camera. The electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 310 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display a thumbnail of the screen 311 in the thumbnail display area 312 .
在一些实施例中,切换前置/后置摄像头控件313可以接收用户的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将前置摄像头切换为其他的摄像头(例如后置摄像头),或者将后置摄像头切换为前置摄像头。In some embodiments, the front/rear camera switching control 313 can receive a user's input operation. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 switches the front camera to another camera (such as a rear camera), or changes the front camera to another camera (such as a rear camera). The rear camera switches to the front camera.
在一些实施例中,后置摄像头包括多个摄像头,例如分别是主摄、长焦、广角、微距等。在用户选择将前置摄像头切换为后置摄像头时,电子设备100可以给出提示信息,该提示信息用于提示用户选择采用后置摄像头中的哪一个摄像头采集画面并显示在第三区域上。In some embodiments, the rear camera includes multiple cameras, such as main camera, telephoto camera, wide-angle camera, macro camera, etc. When the user chooses to switch the front camera to the rear camera, the electronic device 100 can give prompt information, which prompts the user to choose which camera among the rear cameras to use to capture the image and display it in the third area.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以不给出提示信息,而是采用预设的摄像头(例如长焦摄像头)采集画面并显示在第三区域上。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may not give prompt information, but use a preset camera (for example, a telephoto camera) to capture images and display them on the third area.
示例性的,如图4H所示,电子设备100接收用户针对切换前置/后置摄像头控件313的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100输出如图4I所示的提示信息333,提示信息333用于提示用户选择第一摄像头和第二摄像头的类型,第一摄像头可以是采集画面306的摄像头,第二摄像头可以是采集画面311的摄像头。如图4J所示,电子设备100接收用户操作,将第一摄像头的类型选中为主摄,将第二摄像头的类型选中为广角。选中之后,如图4K 所示,电子设备100在分割线307的左侧显示主摄摄像头采集的画面,在分割线307的右侧显示广角摄像头采集的画面。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 4H, the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation for switching the front/rear camera control 313. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 outputs prompt information 333 as shown in Figure 4I, The prompt information 333 is used to prompt the user to select the type of the first camera and the second camera. The first camera may be the camera that collects the picture 306, and the second camera may be the camera that collects the picture 311. As shown in FIG. 4J , the electronic device 100 receives a user operation and selects the first camera type as the main camera, and selects the second camera type as wide-angle. After selection, as shown in Figure 4K As shown in the figure, the electronic device 100 displays the image captured by the main camera on the left side of the dividing line 307 and displays the image captured by the wide-angle camera on the right side of the dividing line 307 .
在一些实施例中,图4F-图4K所示的相机设置选项中的录像选项可以接收用户的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100可以在第二相机界面显示视频拍摄画面。这样,电子设备100可以在第一相机界面显示图片拍摄画面,在第二相机界面显示视频拍摄画面。In some embodiments, the video recording option in the camera setting options shown in FIGS. 4F to 4K can receive the user's input operation, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 can display the video shooting screen on the second camera interface. In this way, the electronic device 100 can display the picture shooting screen on the first camera interface, and display the video shooting screen on the second camera interface.
示例性的,如图4L所示,电子设备100接收用户针对相机界面308中的相机设置选项中的录像选项的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100显示如图4M所示的用户界面。相机界面308中的视频拍摄画面显示区域显示的是视频拍摄画面,且拍摄控件310的显示状态从相机状态切换为录像状态。之后,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件310的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将相机界面308中的视频拍摄画面显示区域显示的视频拍摄画面保存在本地。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4L , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (eg, click) for the video recording option in the camera setting options in the camera interface 308 . In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 displays as shown in FIG. The user interface shown in 4M. The video shooting screen display area in the camera interface 308 displays the video shooting screen, and the display state of the shooting control 310 is switched from the camera state to the video recording state. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the shooting control 310. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the video shooting screen displayed in the video shooting screen display area in the camera interface 308 locally. .
在一些实施例中,如图4M所示,电子设备100展开卷轴屏后,电子设备100可以直接在相机界面308上显示视频拍摄画面,相机界面308可以仅包括视频拍摄画面显示区域、拍摄控件316、设置控件等。其中,拍摄控件316的显示状态为拍摄状态。之后,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件316的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将相机界面308中的视频拍摄画面显示区域显示的视频拍摄画面保存在本地。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 4M, after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the electronic device 100 can directly display the video shooting screen on the camera interface 308. The camera interface 308 can only include the video shooting screen display area and the shooting control 316. , set controls, etc. Among them, the display state of the shooting control 316 is the shooting state. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation (for example, click) on the shooting control 316. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the video shooting screen displayed in the video shooting screen display area in the camera interface 308 locally. .
可选的,图4M所示的相机界面308也可以包括略缩图显示区域312、切换前置/后置摄像头控件313等。Optionally, the camera interface 308 shown in FIG. 4M may also include a thumbnail display area 312, a front/rear camera switching control 313, etc.
可选的,图4M所示的相机界面308也可以包括略缩图显示区域312、切换前置/后置摄像头控件313、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)等。Optionally, the camera interface 308 shown in Figure 4M may also include a thumbnail display area 312, front/rear camera switching control 313, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video recording options) Options, Professional Options, More Options), etc.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作一,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域和第三区域共同显示第一相机界面或者第二相机界面。这样,电子设备100可以扩大相机界面的显示区域,使得相机界面内的摄像头采集的图像内容和更丰富。可选的,触发电子设备100在在第二区域和第三区域共同显示第一相机界面或者第二相机界面的操作可以与操作二不同。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 is in the first state, and the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded, and the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation. After displaying The first camera interface is displayed in the first area. After that, the electronic device 100 receives a user's operation, and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may jointly display the first camera interface or the second camera interface in the second area and the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can expand the display area of the camera interface, so that the image content collected by the camera in the camera interface is richer. Optionally, the operation of triggering the electronic device 100 to jointly display the first camera interface or the second camera interface in the second area and the third area may be different from operation two.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100展开卷轴屏之后,电子设备100在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域上显示第二相机界面。之后,电子设备100可以接收用户操作,使得电子设备100可以在第二区域和第三区域共同显示第一相机界面或者第二相机界面。这样,电子设备100可以扩大相机界面的显示区域,使得相机界面内的摄像头采集的图像内容和更丰富。In some embodiments, after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the electronic device 100 displays the first camera interface on the second area and the second camera interface on the third area. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive a user operation, so that the electronic device 100 may jointly display the first camera interface or the second camera interface in the second area and the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can expand the display area of the camera interface, so that the image content collected by the camera in the camera interface is richer.
图4N示例性示出了电子设备100在第三区域上显示第二相机界面的示意图。图4N示出了相机界面317。相机界面317所在的区域为第三区域。相机界面317中包括有摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件321、略缩图显示区域319、切换前置/后置摄像头控件320、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域用于显示前置摄像头/后置摄像头捕捉到的画面318。 画面318与图4B所示的画面306的区别在于,画面318内的内容比画面306内的内容更丰富。FIG. 4N exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 displaying the second camera interface on the third area. Figure 4N shows camera interface 317. The area where the camera interface 317 is located is the third area. The camera interface 317 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 321, thumbnail display area 319, front/rear camera switching control 320, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo taking options, Recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc. The camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 318. The difference between the screen 318 and the screen 306 shown in FIG. 4B is that the content in the screen 318 is richer than the content in the screen 306 .
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以接收用户的旋转操作,切换第二相机界面的显示方向。这样,可以改变第二相机界面内摄像头采集的画面的显示比例。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's rotation operation and switch the display direction of the second camera interface. In this way, the display ratio of the picture captured by the camera in the second camera interface can be changed.
如图4O所示,电子设备100接收用户针对电子设备100的旋转操作(例如向顺时针方向旋转90度的操作),响应于用户的旋转操作,电子设备100将显示如图4P所示的相机界面322。As shown in FIG. 4O , the electronic device 100 receives the user's rotation operation on the electronic device 100 (for example, an operation of rotating 90 degrees clockwise). In response to the user's rotation operation, the electronic device 100 will display the camera as shown in FIG. 4P Interface 322.
如图4P所示,电子设备100的显示形态为向顺时针方向旋转90度后的显示形态。图4P所示的相机界面322包括有摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件321、略缩图显示区域319、切换前置/后置摄像头控件320、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域用于显示前置摄像头/后置摄像头捕捉到的画面323。画面323与图4N所示的画面318的区别在于,画面323与画面318的显示比例不同,例如画面323的显示比例为3:4,画面318显示比例为4:3。As shown in FIG. 4P , the display form of the electronic device 100 is a display form rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction. The camera interface 322 shown in Figure 4P includes a camera capture screen display area, a shooting control 321, a thumbnail display area 319, a front/rear camera switching control 320, and camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, and large aperture options). , photo options, video options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc. The camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 323. The difference between the screen 323 and the screen 318 shown in FIG. 4N is that the display ratios of the screen 323 and the screen 318 are different. For example, the display ratio of the screen 323 is 3:4, and the display ratio of the screen 318 is 4:3.
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,第一相机界面内显示的摄像头采集的画面。电子设备100接收用户针对第一相机界面上的拍摄控件的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. One camera interface, the picture collected by the camera is displayed in the first camera interface. The electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation on the shooting control on the first camera interface. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen includes a second area and a third area.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域上显示摄像头采集的画面以同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值处理的一张或多张图片。同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值可以是:不同的滤镜效果、不同的广角参数、不同的焦距参数等。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can display the first camera interface in the second area, and display one or more pictures collected by the camera using different parameter values of the same photography parameter in the third area. Different parameter values for the same photography parameter can be: different filter effects, different wide-angle parameters, different focal length parameters, etc.
在其他实施例中,电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域上显示摄像头采集的画面以多种(至少两种)拍照参数处理的一张或多张图片。多种拍照参数可以是以下任意两种或多种:滤镜、广角、焦距、曝光、光圈、快门、闪光灯。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface on the second area, and display one or more pictures collected by the camera processed with multiple (at least two) photography parameters on the third area. Various photography parameters can be any two or more of the following: filter, wide angle, focal length, exposure, aperture, shutter, flash.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以接收用户的操作三,使得卷轴屏的显示区域继续增大,这样,变大后的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第四区域和第五区域,电子设备100可以在第四区域上显示第一相机界面,在第五区域上显示摄像头采集的画面以同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值或者摄像头采集的画面以多种(至少两种)拍照参数处理的一张或多张图片,但是第五区域上显示的一张或多张图片和第三区域上显示的一张或多张图片的排列方式不同。在其他可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以接收用户的操作四,选中第三区域或者第五区域上的一张或多张图片并保存在相册。In one possible implementation, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's operation three, so that the display area of the scroll screen continues to increase. In this way, the enlarged displayable area of the scroll screen includes the fourth area and the fifth area, The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the fourth area, and display the picture collected by the camera in the fifth area with different parameter values of the same photographing parameter or the picture collected by the camera in multiple (at least two) photographing parameters. One or more pictures are processed, but the arrangement of the one or more pictures displayed in the fifth area and the one or more pictures displayed in the third area are different. In other possible implementations, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation 4, select one or more pictures in the third area or the fifth area and save them in the photo album.
在其他实施例中,电子设备100可以不显示相机界面,而是在第二区域上和第三区域上显示摄像头采集的画面以同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值处理的一张或多张图片,或者摄像头采集的画面以多种(至少两种)拍照参数处理的一张或多张图片。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may not display the camera interface, but display one or more pictures captured by the camera on the second area and the third area and processed with different parameter values of the same photography parameter. , or one or more pictures in which the pictures collected by the camera are processed with multiple (at least two) photographing parameters.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以接收用户针对分割线的左右移动操作,改变分割线左右显示的界面的显示区域大小。In a possible implementation, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's left and right movement operation on the dividing line, and change the display area size of the interface displayed on the left and right sides of the dividing line.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以接收用户针对卷轴屏上显示的一张或多张图片的选中操作,并将用户选中的一张或多张图片保存在图库中。In a possible implementation, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's selection operation on one or more pictures displayed on the scroll screen, and save the one or more pictures selected by the user in the gallery.
图5A-图5X示例性示出了电子设备100同时显示相机界面和滤镜图片的示意图。5A-5X exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 simultaneously displays a camera interface and a filter picture.
如图5A所示,电子设备100接收用户针对相机设置选项中设置选项的输入操作(例如 单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100显示如图5B所示的选项栏501,选项栏501中示出了一个或多个拍照参数选项,例如滤镜选项、广角选项、焦距选项等。电子设备100还可以接收用户选项栏501的滑动操作(例如向上滑动操作)显示其他未显示的拍照参数选项,例如曝光、光圈、快门、闪光灯等。As shown in FIG. 5A , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation for a setting option in the camera setting options (for example, click), in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 displays the option bar 501 as shown in FIG. 5B . The option bar 501 shows one or more photographing parameter options, such as filter options, wide-angle options, and focal length options. wait. The electronic device 100 can also receive a sliding operation (such as an upward sliding operation) of the user option bar 501 to display other undisplayed photographing parameter options, such as exposure, aperture, shutter, flash, etc.
本申请以下实施例以拍照参数选项为滤镜选项为例示例性说明。The following embodiments of the present application take the photographing parameter option as the filter option as an example to illustrate.
如图5B所示,电子设备100接收用户针对选项栏501中滤镜选项的输入操作(例如单击操作),响应于用户的输入操作,之后,电子设备100将更多选项的显示状态变为如图5C所示的显示状态。As shown in FIG. 5B , the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as a click operation) for the filter options in the option bar 501 , and responds to the user's input operation. After that, the electronic device 100 changes the display status of more options to The display state is as shown in Figure 5C.
如图5C所示,电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击操作),这里针对拍摄控件303的输入操作也可以被称为操作二。响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,电子设备100展开卷轴屏后,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。分割线307左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线307的右侧为第三区域。第二区域与第一区域的尺寸大小可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不做限定。As shown in FIG. 5C , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303 , where the input operation on the shooting control 303 may also be referred to as operation two. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. After the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen, the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area. The display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area. The size of the second area and the first area may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选的,电子设备100在接收用户针对选项栏501中滤镜选项的输入操作(例如单击操作)后,电子设备100直接展开卷轴屏,即不需要用户点击拍摄控件303。这样,可以防止卷轴屏展开过程中,电子设备100抖动影响拍摄照片的效果。这里,用户针对选项栏501中滤镜选项的输入操作也可以被称为操作二。Optionally, after the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as a click operation) for the filter option in the option bar 501, the electronic device 100 directly expands the scroll screen, that is, the user does not need to click the shooting control 303. In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic device 100 from shaking during the unfolding process of the scroll screen and affecting the effect of taking photos. Here, the user's input operation for the filter option in the option bar 501 may also be referred to as operation two.
电子设备100在卷轴屏的第二区域显示相机界面302,在卷轴屏的第三区域上显示电子设备100摄像头采集的画面以不同的滤镜效果处理的多张图片。例如,卷轴屏的第三区域上显示有以滤镜一处理的图片502和以滤镜二处理的图片503。The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 in the second area of the scroll screen, and displays multiple pictures collected by the camera of the electronic device 100 and processed with different filter effects on the third area of the scroll screen. For example, a picture 502 processed with filter one and a picture 503 processed with filter two are displayed on the third area of the scroll screen.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100展开卷轴屏之前,电子设备100可以显示如图5E所示的提示信息555,提示信息555用于提示用户是否需展开卷轴屏,显示不同的滤镜效果图,提示信息555包括的内容可以是“是否展开卷轴屏,并显示不同的滤镜效果图?”,提示信息555还包括控件505和控件506。其中,电子设备100可以接收用户针对控件505的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将卷轴屏展开,并显示如图5D所示的界面。In some embodiments, before the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen, the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 555 as shown in Figure 5E. The prompt information 555 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen and display different filter effect images. , the content included in the prompt information 555 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display different filter renderings?" The prompt information 555 also includes controls 505 and 506 . The electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click) on the control 505. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 5D.
在一些实施例中,如图5F所示,电子设备100可以接收用户针对第三区域的向上滑动操作,响应于向上滑动操作,电子设备100将在第三区域上显示其他未显示的以其他滤镜效果处理的图片。如图5G所示,电子设备100在第三区域还显示了一滤镜三处理的图片504。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 5F , the electronic device 100 may receive the user's upward sliding operation for the third area. In response to the upward sliding operation, the electronic device 100 will display other undisplayed and other filters on the third area. Pictures processed with mirror effects. As shown in FIG. 5G , the electronic device 100 also displays a picture 504 processed by filter three in the third area.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以接收用户的操作三,使得卷轴屏的显示区域继续增大,这样,变大后的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第四区域和第五区域。如图5H所示,图5H示出了继续展开后的扩展屏。其中,分割线307的左侧的显示区域为第四区域,第四区域可以与第一区域相同,也可以与第一区域不同。分割线307的右侧的显示区域为第五区域,第五区域的面积大于第三区域的面积。这样,电子设备100可以改变多个以不同的滤镜效果处理的图片的排列顺序。示例性的,在图5H中,电子设备100可以同时显示图片502、图片503和图片504。这样,方便用户同时查看多个以不同的滤镜效果处理的图片。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation three, so that the display area of the scroll screen continues to increase. In this way, the enlarged displayable area of the scroll screen includes the fourth area and the fifth area. As shown in Figure 5H, Figure 5H shows the expanded screen after continued expansion. The display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is a fourth area, and the fourth area may be the same as the first area, or may be different from the first area. The display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the fifth area, and the area of the fifth area is larger than the area of the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can change the arrangement order of multiple pictures processed with different filter effects. Exemplarily, in FIG. 5H , the electronic device 100 can display pictures 502, 503, and 504 at the same time. In this way, it is convenient for users to view multiple pictures processed with different filter effects at the same time.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100展开卷轴屏之后,电子设备100也可以不显示相机界面,而是在第二区域上和第三区域上显示摄像头采集的画面以同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值处 理的一张或多张图片,或者摄像头采集的画面以多种(至少两种)拍照参数处理的一张或多张图片。In some embodiments, after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the electronic device 100 may not display the camera interface, but display the images captured by the camera in the second area and the third area with different parameters of the same photographing parameters. value One or more pictures processed by the camera, or one or more pictures processed by multiple (at least two) camera parameters.
示例性的,参考前述图5A-图5C的描述,电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开如图5I所示的卷轴屏,图5I所示的分割线307的左侧为卷轴屏的第二区域,分割线307的右侧为卷轴屏的第三区域。电子设备100在第二区域上显示以滤镜一处理的图片507,在第三区域上显示以滤镜二处理的图片508。这样,用户可以直观的比较两个以不同的滤镜效果处理的图片。Illustratively, with reference to the aforementioned descriptions of FIGS. 5A-5C , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll as shown in FIG. 5I Screen, the left side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIG. 5I is the second area of the scroll screen, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area of the scroll screen. The electronic device 100 displays the image 507 processed with filter one on the second area, and displays the image 508 processed with filter two on the third area. In this way, users can intuitively compare two pictures processed with different filter effects.
可选的,如图5I所示,第二区域还显示有返回控件530,电子设备100可以接收针对返回控件530的触发操作(例如单击),响应于用户的触发操作,电子设备100将在第二区域上显示相机界面306,在第三区域上显示图片507和图片508。Optionally, as shown in Figure 5I, the second area also displays a return control 530. The electronic device 100 can receive a trigger operation (such as a click) for the return control 530. In response to the user's trigger operation, the electronic device 100 will The camera interface 306 is displayed on the second area, and the picture 507 and the picture 508 are displayed on the third area.
可选的,不仅限于同时显示两个不同滤镜效果处理的图片,电子设备100也可以在卷轴屏的显示区域上同时显示两个以上以不同的滤镜效果处理的图片。Optionally, the electronic device 100 is not limited to displaying two pictures processed with different filter effects at the same time. The electronic device 100 can also display two or more pictures processed with different filter effects simultaneously on the display area of the scroll screen.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以接收并响应用户针对分割线307的向左/右移动操作,改变图片507和图片508的尺寸大小。In a possible implementation, the electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's left/right movement operation on the dividing line 307 to change the size of the picture 507 and the picture 508 .
示例性的,如图5J所示,电子设备100接收并响应用户拖动分割线307向左侧的滑动操作,电子设备100卷轴屏的显示区域包括第七区域和第八区域。如图5K所示,分割线307左侧的显示区域为第七区域,分割线307右侧的显示区域为第八区域,第七区域的尺寸小于第二区域的尺寸,第八区域的尺寸大于第三区域的尺寸。电子设备100在第七区域上显示以滤镜一处理的图片507,在第八区域上显示以滤镜二处理的图片508。For example, as shown in FIG. 5J , the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 307 to the left, and the display area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a seventh area and an eighth area. As shown in FIG. 5K , the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the seventh area, the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the eighth area, the size of the seventh area is smaller than the size of the second area, and the size of the eighth area is larger than The size of the third area. The electronic device 100 displays the image 507 processed with filter one on the seventh area, and displays the image 508 processed with filter two on the eighth area.
或者,如图5L示,电子设备100接收并响应用户拖动分割线307向右侧的滑动操作,电子设备100卷轴屏的显示区域包括第九域和第十域。如图5M示,分割线307左侧的显示区域为第九区域,分割线307右侧的显示区域为第十区域,第九区域的尺寸大于第二区域的尺寸,第十区域的尺寸小于第三区域的尺寸。电子设备100在第九区域上显示以滤镜一处理的图片507,在第十区域上显示以滤镜二处理的图片508。Or, as shown in FIG. 5L , the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 307 to the right, and the display area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the ninth domain and the tenth domain. As shown in FIG. 5M , the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the ninth area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the tenth area. The size of the ninth area is larger than the size of the second area, and the size of the tenth area is smaller than the size of the second area. Three area sizes. The electronic device 100 displays the image 507 processed with filter one on the ninth area, and displays the image 508 processed with filter two on the tenth area.
在其他实施例中,电子设备100可以接收用户的输入操作,响应于该输入操作,电子设备100可以切换图片507和图片508在卷轴屏的显示位置。例如,该输入操作可以是用户的食指触摸图片508,大拇指触摸图片507,然后两根手指向着相互靠近的方向滑动。其中,电子设备100切换了图片507和图片508的显示位置可以参考图5O。如图5O所示,电子设备100可以在分割线307的左侧显示图片508,分割线307的右侧显示图片507。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation, and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may switch the display positions of the picture 507 and the picture 508 on the scroll screen. For example, the input operation may be that the user's index finger touches the picture 508, his thumb touches the picture 507, and then the two fingers slide in a direction toward each other. When the electronic device 100 switches the display positions of the picture 507 and the picture 508, please refer to FIG. 5O. As shown in FIG. 5O , the electronic device 100 may display a picture 508 on the left side of the dividing line 307 and a picture 507 on the right side of the dividing line 307 .
在其他实施例中,电子设备100展开卷轴屏之后,电子设备100在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域上显示摄像头采集的画面以同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值处理的一张或多张图片,或者摄像头采集的画面以多种(至少两种)拍照参数处理的一张或多张图片。之后,电子设备100可以接收用户在第三区域的操作,改变第三区域上一张或多张图片的显示尺寸。示例性的,如图5P所示,第三区域上显示有图片502、图片503和分割线510。In other embodiments, after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the electronic device 100 displays the first camera interface on the second area, and displays the images collected by the camera processed with different parameter values of the same photography parameter on the third area. One or more pictures, or one or more pictures collected by the camera and processed with multiple (at least two) photography parameters. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's operation in the third area and change the display size of one or more pictures in the third area. For example, as shown in Figure 5P, pictures 502, 503 and dividing lines 510 are displayed on the third area.
如图5Q所示,电子设备100接收并响应用户拖动分割线510向上的滑动操作,如图5R所示,电子设备100将缩小图片502的尺寸,并扩大图片503的尺寸。同理,如图5S所示,电子设备100接收并响应用户拖动分割线510向下的滑动操作,如图5T所示,电子设备100将扩大图片502的尺寸,并缩小图片503的尺寸。这样,电子设备100可以动态调整图片502和图片503的尺寸。 As shown in FIG. 5Q , the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 510 upward. As shown in FIG. 5R , the electronic device 100 will reduce the size of the picture 502 and expand the size of the picture 503 . Similarly, as shown in FIG. 5S , the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's sliding operation of dragging the dividing line 510 downward. As shown in FIG. 5T , the electronic device 100 will expand the size of the picture 502 and reduce the size of the picture 503 . In this way, the electronic device 100 can dynamically adjust the size of the picture 502 and the picture 503.
在一些实施例中,第三区域或者第五区域显示的一个或多个图片,可以接收用户的操作四,选中第三区域或者第五区域上的一张或多张图片并保存在相册,或者将第三区域或者第五区域上的一张或多张图片删除或者分享至其他应用。In some embodiments, one or more pictures displayed in the third area or the fifth area can receive the user's operation 4 to select one or more pictures in the third area or the fifth area and save them in the album, or Delete or share one or more pictures in the third or fifth area to other applications.
示例性的,如图5U所示,电子设备100接收用户针对图片504的输入操作(例如长按选中的操作),电子设备100将图片504保存至图库。在一种可能的实现方式中,如图5V所示,在电子设备100将图片504保存至图库后,电子设备100可以显示提示信息505,提示信息505可以是“图片已保存至图库!”。该提示信息505用于提示用户,该图库已经保存至图库。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5U , the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation on the picture 504 (such as a long press operation), and the electronic device 100 saves the picture 504 to the gallery. In a possible implementation, as shown in Figure 5V, after the electronic device 100 saves the picture 504 to the gallery, the electronic device 100 can display prompt information 505, and the prompt information 505 can be "The picture has been saved to the gallery!". The prompt information 505 is used to prompt the user that the gallery has been saved to the gallery.
在其他实施例中,电子设备100可以接收用户的操作,同时选中多张图片,并将选中的多张图片保存至图库。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can receive user operations, select multiple pictures at the same time, and save the selected multiple pictures to the gallery.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100展开卷轴屏之后,电子设备100在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域上全屏显示摄像头采集的画面以同一种拍照参数的不同的参数值处理的一张图片,或者摄像头采集的画面以多种(至少两种)拍照参数处理的一张图片。之后,电子设备100可以接收用户在第三区域的操作,切换在第三区域上显示的其他滤镜效果的图片。In some embodiments, after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the electronic device 100 displays the first camera interface in the second area, and displays the picture captured by the camera in full screen in the third area and processes it with different parameter values of the same photography parameters. A picture, or a picture collected by the camera and processed with multiple (at least two) photography parameters. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation in the third area and switch pictures with other filter effects displayed on the third area.
示例性的,参考前述图5A-图5C的描述,电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开如图5W所示的卷轴屏,图5W所示的分割线307的左侧为卷轴屏的第二区域,分割线307的右侧为卷轴屏的第三区域。电子设备100在第二区域上显示相机界面302,在第三区域上全屏显示以滤镜一处理的图片502。Illustratively, with reference to the aforementioned descriptions of FIGS. 5A-5C , the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll as shown in FIG. 5W Screen, the left side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIG. 5W is the second area of the scroll screen, and the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area of the scroll screen. The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 in the second area, and displays the picture 502 processed with filter one in full screen in the third area.
之后,电子设备100可以接收作用在第三区域上的左右滑动操作,切换显示电子设备100以其他滤镜效果处理的图片。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 can receive a left and right sliding operation on the third area to switch and display pictures processed by the electronic device 100 with other filter effects.
示例性的,如图5W所示,电子设备100接收用户作用在图片502上的向左滑动操作,响应于向左滑动操作,电子设备100在第三区域上显示如图5X所示的以滤镜二处理的图片503。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5W , the electronic device 100 receives the user's left sliding operation on the picture 502 , and in response to the left sliding operation, the electronic device 100 displays on the third area a filter as shown in FIG. 5X Picture 503 processed by Mirror 2.
同理,电子设备100接收用户作用在图片502上的向右滑动操作,响应于向左滑动操作,电子设备100在第三区域上显示以滤镜三处理的图片。本申请实施例在此不再赘述。Similarly, the electronic device 100 receives the user's rightward sliding operation on the picture 502, and in response to the leftward sliding operation, the electronic device 100 displays the picture processed with filter three on the third area. The embodiments of the present application will not be described in detail here.
可选的,电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示图库界面。这样,电子设备100可以同时显示相机界面和图库界面。Optionally, the electronic device 100 is in the first state, and the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded, and the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation. The first camera interface is displayed in an area. After that, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area and display the gallery interface in the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 can display the camera interface and the gallery interface simultaneously.
图6A-图6E示例性示出了电子设备100同时显示相机界面和图库界面的示意图。6A-6E exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 simultaneously displays a camera interface and a gallery interface.
如图6A所示,电子设备100接收用户针对略缩图显示区域304的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。如图6B所示,电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示相机界面302,在第三区域显示图库界面601。其中,图库界面601中显示有多个不同的分类照片的略缩图, 例如所有照片的略缩图,所有照片类别下共有2160张照片。视频的略缩图,视频类别下共有4个视频。相机照片的略缩图,相机照片类别下共有771张照片。连拍照片的略缩图,连拍照片类别下共有2张照片。微信照片的略缩图,微信照片类别下共有2张照片。微博照片的略缩图,微博照片类别下共有172张照片。As shown in FIG. 6A , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (eg, click) on the thumbnail display area 304 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. As shown in FIG. 6B , the electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 302 on the second area and the gallery interface 601 on the third area. Among them, the gallery interface 601 displays thumbnails of multiple different classified photos. For example, thumbnails of all photos, there are a total of 2160 photos under all photo categories. Thumbnails of videos. There are 4 videos in total under the video category. Thumbnails of camera photos. There are 771 photos in total under the camera photos category. Thumbnails of burst photos. There are 2 photos under the burst photo category. Thumbnails of WeChat photos. There are 2 photos under the WeChat photo category. Thumbnails of Weibo photos. There are 172 photos in total under the Weibo photo category.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100在第三区域上显示图库界面601之前,电子设备100可以显示如图6C所示的提示信息602,提示信息602用于提示用户是否展开卷轴屏。提示信息602的内容可以是“是否展开卷轴屏,并显示图库界面?”。提示信息602还包括有控件603和控件604。其中,电子设备100可以接收用户针对控件603的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将显示如图6B所示的界面。In some embodiments, before the electronic device 100 displays the gallery interface 601 on the third area, the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 602 as shown in FIG. 6C , where the prompt information 602 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen. The content of the prompt information 602 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display the gallery interface?". The prompt information 602 also includes a control 603 and a control 604. The electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click) on the control 603, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 will display an interface as shown in FIG. 6B.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以接收用户操作切换相机界面和图库界面在卷轴屏上的位置。例如如图6D所示,该输入操作可以是用户的食指触摸图库界面601,大拇指触摸相机界面302,然后两根手指向着相互靠近的方向滑动。其中,电子设备100切换图库界面601和相机界面302的显示位置。如图6E所示,电子设备100可以在分割线307的左侧显示图库界面601,在分割线307的右侧显示相机界面302。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may receive a user operation to switch the positions of the camera interface and the gallery interface on the scroll screen. For example, as shown in FIG. 6D , the input operation may be that the user's index finger touches the gallery interface 601 , the thumb touches the camera interface 302 , and then the two fingers slide in a direction toward each other. Among them, the electronic device 100 switches the display positions of the gallery interface 601 and the camera interface 302. As shown in FIG. 6E , the electronic device 100 can display the gallery interface 601 on the left side of the dividing line 307 and the camera interface 302 on the right side of the dividing line 307 .
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示放大后的目标物体。这样,电子设备100将相机界面中摄像头采集的画面中的目标物体放大显示,以便用户可以清晰地查看目标物体。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2. The electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface on the second area, and display the enlarged target object on the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 enlarges and displays the target object in the picture captured by the camera in the camera interface, so that the user can clearly view the target object.
图7A-图7H示例性示出了电子设备100在卷轴屏上显示放大后的目标物体的示意图。7A-7H exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying an enlarged target object on a scroll screen.
示例性的,如图7A所示,电子设备100显示相机界面302,相机界面302内显示有摄像头采集的画面306,画面306包括多个不同类型的目标物体,例如目标物体可以是动物(例如鸟)、建筑物(例如摩天轮)、景物(例如太阳和云)等。在一些情况下,由于天气状况不好,或者距离太远,导致用户看不清画面306中具体是什么目标物体。为了使得用户更清晰地观察出画面306中的目标物体,如图7A所示,电子设备100可以接收用户针对目标物体所在的显示区域的选中操作(例如滑动划定区域),响应于用户的触发操作,电子设备100弹框显示用户选中的显示区域内的目标物体,如图7B所示,电子设备100在窗口701中显示用户选中的目标物体。窗口701显示的是目标物体的完整图像。For example, as shown in FIG. 7A , the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 302 , and a picture 306 collected by the camera is displayed in the camera interface 302 . The picture 306 includes multiple different types of target objects. For example, the target object may be an animal (such as a bird). ), buildings (such as Ferris wheel), scenery (such as the sun and clouds), etc. In some cases, due to bad weather conditions or the distance is too far, the user cannot clearly see the specific target object in the picture 306. In order to allow the user to more clearly observe the target object in the screen 306, as shown in FIG. 7A, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's selection operation (such as sliding to delineate the area) of the display area where the target object is located, and respond to the user's trigger In operation, the electronic device 100 pops up a frame to display the target object in the display area selected by the user. As shown in FIG. 7B , the electronic device 100 displays the target object selected by the user in the window 701 . Window 701 displays a complete image of the target object.
可选的,在电子设备100显示窗口701之后,电子设备100可以显示如图7C所示的提示信息702,提示信息702用于提示用户是否需展开卷轴屏。提示信息702的内容可以是“是否展开卷轴屏,并显示目标物体?”。提示信息702中还包括有控件703和控件704。其中,电子设备100可以接收用户针对控件703的输入操作(例如单击操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,并显示如图7D所示的界面。Optionally, after the electronic device 100 displays the window 701, the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 702 as shown in FIG. 7C. The prompt information 702 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen. The content of the prompt information 702 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display the target object?". The prompt information 702 also includes a control 703 and a control 704. The electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the control 703. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 7D.
需要说明的是,电子设备100也可以不显示提示信息702,本申请实施例对此不做限定。It should be noted that the electronic device 100 may not display the prompt information 702, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
如图7D所示,分割线307的左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线307的右侧的显示区域为第三区域,电子设备100在第二区域上显示相机界面302,在第三区域上显示界面705。其中,界面705上显示有用户选中的目标物体,且界面705中的目标物体相比于画面306中的目标物体,放大了2倍,界面705中的目标物体下方还显示有放大倍数,例如“X2”。电子 设备100也可以不显示目标物体的放大倍数,本申请实施例对此不做限定。As shown in FIG. 7D , the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area. The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 on the second area, and on the third area Interface 705 is displayed on the area. Among them, the target object selected by the user is displayed on the interface 705, and the target object in the interface 705 is magnified by 2 times compared with the target object in the screen 306. The magnification factor is also displayed below the target object in the interface 705, such as "X2". electronic The device 100 may not display the magnification of the target object, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选的,电子设备100可以持续性地在相机界面302上显示标记,该标记用于提示用户选中的目标物体所在的区域。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can continuously display a mark on the camera interface 302, and the mark is used to prompt the user of the area where the selected target object is located.
在一些实施例中,随着用户的手指移动,窗口中显示的目标物体的部分放大图像也会发生变化。In some embodiments, as the user's finger moves, the partially enlarged image of the target object displayed in the window changes.
示例性的,参考前述图7A的描述,电子设备100接收用户选中目标物体所在的显示区域的操作(例如滑动划定区域),响应于用户的触发操作,电子设备100弹框显示用户选中的目标物体,如图7E所示,电子设备100在窗口707中显示用户选中的目标物体的部分放大图像。窗口707显示的是目标物体的“翅膀”部位的放大图像。For example, with reference to the description of FIG. 7A , the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation of selecting the display area where the target object is located (such as sliding to delineate the area). In response to the user's trigger operation, the electronic device 100 displays the target selected by the user in a pop-up box. Object, as shown in FIG. 7E , the electronic device 100 displays a partially enlarged image of the target object selected by the user in the window 707 . Window 707 displays an enlarged image of the "wings" portion of the target object.
可选的,用户可以移动手指,窗口707中显示的目标物体的图像随着用户手指移动而移动。例如,当用户的手指作用在目标物体的头部区域时,电子设备100在窗口707中显示目标物体的“头部”部位的放大图像。Optionally, the user can move the finger, and the image of the target object displayed in the window 707 moves as the user moves the finger. For example, when the user's finger acts on the head region of the target object, the electronic device 100 displays an enlarged image of the "head" region of the target object in the window 707 .
如图7F所示,分割线307的左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线307的右侧的显示区域为第三区域,电子设备100在第二区域上显示相机界面302,在第三区域上显示界面708。其中,界面708上显示有用户选中的目标物体的“翅膀”部位的放大图像,且界面708中的目标物体的“头部”部位的放大图像相比于画面306中的目标物体的“头部”部位的图像,放大了2倍,界面708中的目标物体下方还显示有放大倍数,例如“X2”。电子设备100也可以不显示目标物体的放大倍数,本申请实施例对此不做限定。As shown in FIG. 7F , the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area. The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 on the second area, and on the third area Interface 708 is displayed on the area. Among them, an enlarged image of the "wings" part of the target object selected by the user is displayed on the interface 708, and the enlarged image of the "head" part of the target object in the interface 708 is compared with the "head" part of the target object in the screen 306. "The image of the part is magnified by 2 times, and the magnification factor is also displayed below the target object in the interface 708, such as "X2". The electronic device 100 may not display the magnification of the target object, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以接收用户操作改变目标物体的放大倍数。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also receive user operations to change the magnification of the target object.
方式一:电子设备100基于用户的手势一,继续展开卷轴屏,相应的,目标物体的放大倍数也随着卷轴屏的屏幕的扩大而变大。电子设备100也可以基于用户的手势二,收缩卷轴屏,相应的,目标物体的放大倍数也随着卷轴屏的屏幕的收缩而变小。Method 1: The electronic device 100 continues to expand the scroll screen based on the user's gesture 1. Correspondingly, the magnification factor of the target object also increases with the expansion of the scroll screen. The electronic device 100 can also shrink the scroll screen based on the user's gesture 2. Correspondingly, the magnification factor of the target object also becomes smaller as the screen of the scroll screen shrinks.
用户的手势一包括但不仅限于:作用在显示屏上的滑动手势(例如双指滑动手势或者三指滑动手势)、点击手势、叩击手势、作用在电子设备100上的硬件的操作等。The user's gestures include but are not limited to: sliding gestures acting on the display screen (such as two-finger sliding gestures or three-finger sliding gestures), click gestures, tapping gestures, operations of hardware on the electronic device 100, etc.
用户的手势二包括但不仅限于:作用在显示屏上的滑动手势(例如双指滑动手势或者三指滑动手势)、点击手势、叩击手势、作用在电子设备100上的硬件的操作等。The second gesture of the user includes but is not limited to: sliding gestures acting on the display screen (such as two-finger sliding gestures or three-finger sliding gestures), click gestures, tapping gestures, operations of hardware on the electronic device 100 , etc.
手势一和手势二的具体实现方式不同。The specific implementation methods of gesture one and gesture two are different.
方式二:电子设备100在第三区域在除了显示放大的目标物体的图像,还可以显示放大/缩小控件,电子设备100可以基于用户针对放大/缩小控件的输入操作,改变目标物体的放大倍数。Method 2: In addition to displaying the enlarged image of the target object in the third area, the electronic device 100 can also display a zoom-in/zoom-out control. The electronic device 100 can change the magnification factor of the target object based on the user's input operation on the zoom-in/zoom-out control.
如图7G所示,电子设备100在界面705上还显示了放大/缩小控件,例如控件709、控件710、控件711和控件712等。其中,电子设备100可以接收并响应用户针对控件709的输入操作,将目标物体的放大倍数由2倍缩小为1倍,对应的,界面705上的显示的目标物体的图像大小也会缩小。可选的,卷轴屏的大小也可以随着界面705上的显示的目标物体的图像缩小而缩小。电子设备100可以接收并响应用户针对控件710的输入操作,将目标物体的放大倍数由2倍扩大为4倍,对应的,界面705上的显示的目标物体的图像大小也会扩大。可选的,卷轴屏的大小也可以随着界面705上的显示的目标物体的图像扩大而扩大。电子设备100可以接收并响应用户针对控件711的输入操作,将目标物体的放大倍数由4倍扩大为6倍,对应的,界面705上的显示的目标物体的图像大小也会扩大。可选的,卷轴屏的大小 也可以随着界面705上的显示的目标物体的图像扩大而扩大。电子设备100可以接收并响应用户针对控件712的输入操作,选择其他的放大倍数或者缩小倍数。As shown in FIG. 7G , the electronic device 100 also displays zoom-in/zoom-out controls on the interface 705, such as controls 709, controls 710, controls 711, and controls 712. The electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 709 and reduce the magnification of the target object from 2 times to 1 time. Correspondingly, the image size of the target object displayed on the interface 705 will also be reduced. Optionally, the size of the scroll screen can also be reduced as the image of the target object displayed on the interface 705 is reduced. The electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 710 and expand the magnification of the target object from 2 times to 4 times. Correspondingly, the image size of the target object displayed on the interface 705 will also be expanded. Optionally, the size of the scroll screen can also be expanded as the image of the target object displayed on the interface 705 expands. The electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 711 and expand the magnification of the target object from 4 times to 6 times. Correspondingly, the image size of the target object displayed on the interface 705 will also be expanded. Optional, scroll screen size It may also be expanded as the image of the target object displayed on the interface 705 is expanded. The electronic device 100 can receive and respond to the user's input operation on the control 712 to select other magnification or reduction factors.
示例性的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对控件710的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将目标物体的放大倍数由2倍扩大为4倍,并将扩大后的目标物体的图像显示在卷轴屏上。可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对控件710的输入操作,继续扩展卷轴屏。如图7H所示,电子设备100在分割线307的右侧显示界面714,界面714所在的显示区域的面积大于界面705所在的显示区域的面积。界面714上显示有放大倍数为4倍的目标物体的图像,界面714上还显示有放大/缩小控件,例如控件709、控件713、控件711和控件712。For example, the electronic device 100 can receive a user's input operation on the control 710. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the magnification of the target object from 2 times to 4 times, and displays the enlarged image of the target object. Displayed on scroll screen. Optionally, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's input operation on the control 710 and continue to expand the scroll screen. As shown in FIG. 7H , the electronic device 100 displays the interface 714 on the right side of the dividing line 307 , and the area of the display area where the interface 714 is located is larger than the area of the display area where the interface 705 is located. The interface 714 displays an image of the target object with a magnification factor of 4 times, and the interface 714 also displays zoom-in/zoom-out controls, such as controls 709, 713, 711, and 712.
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示电子设备100识别到的目标物体的详情信息。这样,电子设备100将识别到的目标物体的详情信息显示在卷轴屏,以便用户可以查看目标物体的详情信息。目标物体的详情信息包括但不仅限于:目标物体的名称、目标物体的特征、目标物体的习性、与目标相似的其他物体等。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2. The electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area, and display detailed information of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area. In this way, the electronic device 100 displays the detailed information of the recognized target object on the scroll screen, so that the user can view the detailed information of the target object. The detailed information of the target object includes but is not limited to: the name of the target object, the characteristics of the target object, the habits of the target object, other objects similar to the target, etc.
图8A-图8F示例性示出了电子设备100将识别到的目标物体的详情信息显示在卷轴屏的示意图。8A to 8F exemplarily illustrate a schematic diagram in which the electronic device 100 displays detailed information of a recognized target object on a scroll screen.
如图8A所示,电子设备100显示相机界面801,相机界面801所在的区域为第一区域,相机界面801也可以被称为第一相机界面。相机界面801包括有摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件303、略缩图显示区域304、切换前置/后置摄像头控件305、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域用于显示前置摄像头/后置摄像头捕捉到的画面802。电子设备100可以接收对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于该输入操作,电子设备100可以在略缩图显示区域304显示摄像头捕捉到的画面。As shown in FIG. 8A , the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 801. The area where the camera interface 801 is located is the first area. The camera interface 801 may also be called the first camera interface. The camera interface 801 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc. The camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 802. The electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the image captured by the camera in the thumbnail display area 304 .
之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示相机界面801,在第三区域显示电子设备100识别到的目标物体的图像的详情信息。After that, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area. The electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 801 in the second area, and display detailed information of the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area.
操作二也可以是用户针对画面802的输入操作。示例性的,如图8A所示,第二操作可以是用户针对画面802中的目标物体(例如宠物狗)所在的显示区域的长按操作。示例性的,如图8B所示,第二操作还可以是用户针对画面802中的目标物体(例如宠物狗)所在的显示区域的滑动操作,用户的滑动操作用于圈定出目标物体在画面802中所在的显示区域。操作二还可以是其他的操作,本申请实施例在此不做限定。Operation two may also be a user input operation on screen 802. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A , the second operation may be a long press operation by the user on the display area where the target object (eg, pet dog) in the screen 802 is located. For example, as shown in FIG. 8B , the second operation may also be the user's sliding operation on the display area where the target object (such as a pet dog) in the screen 802 is located. The user's sliding operation is used to circle the target object in the screen 802 in the display area. Operation 2 may also be other operations, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以不接收用户的操作,而是基于图像识别算法自动从画面802中识别到的目标物体。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may not receive user operations, but may automatically recognize the target object in the screen 802 based on an image recognition algorithm.
可选的,电子设备100可以同时识别到多个不同的目标物体,电子设备100可以将多个不同的目标物体的详情信息同时显示在第三区域上。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display detailed information of multiple different target objects on the third area at the same time.
可选的,电子设备100可以同时识别到多个不同的目标物体,电子设备100可以给出提示信息,让用户选择将多个不同的目标物体中的一个或多个目标物体,并将用户选择的一个 或多个目标物体的详情信息显示在第三区域上。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can give prompt information to allow the user to select one or more target objects among the multiple different target objects, and prompt the user to select the target object. one of Detailed information of one or more target objects is displayed on the third area.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100接收用户的操作二后,或者电子设备100自动识别从画面802中识别到的目标物体后,电子设备100可以显示如图8C所示的提示信息804,提示信息804用于提示用户是否展开卷轴屏。提示信息804内的提示内容可以是“是否展开卷轴屏,并显示目标物体?”。提示信息804还包括控件805和控件806。其中,电子设备100可以接收用户针对控件805的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,并显示如图8D所示的界面。In some embodiments, after the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2, or after the electronic device 100 automatically recognizes the target object recognized in the screen 802, the electronic device 100 may display prompt information 804 as shown in FIG. 8C. Information 804 is used to prompt the user whether to expand the scroll screen. The prompt content in the prompt information 804 may be "Do you want to expand the scroll screen and display the target object?". The prompt information 804 also includes controls 805 and 806 . The electronic device 100 can receive the user's input operation on the control 805. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 8D.
如图8D所示,电子设备100在分割线307左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线307右侧的显示区域为第三区域,电子设备100在第二区域上显示界面801,在第三区域上显示界面807。其中,界面807内显示有目标物体的图像,目标物体的名称(例如“A型犬”)。As shown in FIG. 8D , the display area of the electronic device 100 on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area. The electronic device 100 displays the interface 801 on the second area. Interface 807 is displayed on the three areas. Among them, the image of the target object and the name of the target object (for example, "Type A dog") are displayed in the interface 807 .
在一些实施例中,如图8E所示,电子设备100除了在界面807上显示目标物体的图像和名称外,电子设备100还可以在界面807上显示目标物体的简介信息,简介信息可以是“AAAAAABBBBBBCCCCCDDDDDEEEEEEEFFFFFFGGGGGGGHHHHH”。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 8E , in addition to displaying the image and name of the target object on the interface 807, the electronic device 100 can also display profile information of the target object on the interface 807. The profile information can be " AAAAAABBBBBBCCCCCDDDDDEEEEEEEFFFFFFGGGGGGGHHHHH”.
在一些实施例中,如图8F所示,电子设备100除了在界面807上显示目标物体的图像和名称外,电子设备100还可以在界面807上显示相似的其他目标物体的图像和名称。例如与“A型犬”相似的“B型犬”的图像和名称,与“A型犬”相似的“C型犬”的图像和名称。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 8F , in addition to displaying the image and name of the target object on the interface 807 , the electronic device 100 can also display the images and names of other similar target objects on the interface 807 . For example, the image and name of "Type B dog" are similar to "Type A dog", and the image and name of "Type C dog" are similar to "Type A dog".
在其他实施例中,电子设备100可以同时在界面807上显示目标物体的图像,目标物体的名称、目标物体的简介信息、与目标物体的相似的其他目标物体的图像和名称等,本申请实施例在此不做限定。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can simultaneously display the image of the target object, the name of the target object, the profile information of the target object, the images and names of other target objects similar to the target object, etc. on the interface 807. This application implements The examples are not limited here.
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示电子设备100识别到的目标物体的图像。之后,电子设备100可以接收用户的操作,切换第三区域上显示的目标物体的背景效果。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2. The electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area, and display the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may receive the user's operation to switch the background effect of the target object displayed on the third area.
图9A-图9G示例性示出了电子设备100切换目标物体的背景示意图。9A-9G exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 switching a target object.
其中,图9A-图9C示例性示出了一种电子设备100切换目标物体的背景示意图。Among them, FIGS. 9A-9C exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of the electronic device 100 switching a target object.
如图9A所示,电子设备100显示相机界面901,相机界面901所在的区域为第一区域,相机界面901也可以被称为第一相机界面。相机界面901包括有摄像头捕捉画面显示区域、拍摄控件303、略缩图显示区域304、切换前置/后置摄像头控件305、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)、设置控件等,摄像头捕捉画面显示区域用于显示前置摄像头/后置摄像头捕捉到的画面902。电子设备100可以接收对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击),响应于该输入操作,电子设备100可以在略缩图显示区域304显示摄像头捕捉到的画面。As shown in FIG. 9A , the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 901. The area where the camera interface 901 is located is the first area. The camera interface 901 may also be called the first camera interface. The camera interface 901 includes a camera capture screen display area, shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video recording options, professional options, more options), setting controls, etc., the camera capture screen display area is used to display the screen captured by the front camera/rear camera 902. The electronic device 100 may receive an input operation (eg, click) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the input operation, the electronic device 100 may display the image captured by the camera in the thumbnail display area 304 .
之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示相机界面901,在第三区域显示电子设备100识别到的目标物体的图像。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the second area and the third area. The electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 901 on the second area, and display the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 on the third area.
其中,操作二是使得电子设备100展开卷轴屏的操作,操作二具体可以是作用在显示屏上的滑动手势(例如双指滑动手势或者三指滑动手势)、点击手势、叩击手势、作用在电子设备100上的硬件的操作等。 The second operation is to make the electronic device 100 unfold the scroll screen. The second operation may specifically be a sliding gesture (such as a two-finger sliding gesture or a three-finger sliding gesture), a clicking gesture, a tapping gesture, or a sliding gesture acting on the display screen. Operation of hardware on the electronic device 100, etc.
如图9B所示,电子设备100展开卷轴屏之后,分割线903的左侧和分割线904上方的显示区域为第二区域,分割线903的右侧和分割线904上方的显示区域为第三区域,分割线904下方的显示区域可以称为第十一区域。As shown in FIG. 9B , after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the display area to the left of the dividing line 903 and above the dividing line 904 is the second area, and the display area to the right of the dividing line 903 and above the dividing line 904 is the third area. area, the display area below the dividing line 904 may be called an eleventh area.
电子设备100在第二区域上显示画面902和设置控件,在第三区域上显示电子设备100识别到的画面902里的目标物体的图片905,图片905内仅包括目标物体的图像。电子设备100在第十一区域显示相机界面901内的控件,例如拍摄控件303、略缩图显示区域304、切换前置/后置摄像头控件305、相机设置选项(夜景选项、人像选项、大光圈选项、拍照选项、录像选项、专业选项、更多选项)等。第二区域和第三区域上还显示有切换背景控件,例如控件906、控件907、控件908、控件909、控件910。第二区域上显示的图片905无背景效果,那么电子设备100可以将控件906突出显示(例如将控件906所在的显示区域加深显示)。The electronic device 100 displays the screen 902 and setting controls on the second area, and displays the picture 905 of the target object in the screen 902 recognized by the electronic device 100 on the third area. The picture 905 only includes the image of the target object. The electronic device 100 displays controls in the camera interface 901 in the eleventh area, such as shooting controls 303, thumbnail display area 304, front/rear camera switching control 305, camera setting options (night scene options, portrait options, large aperture options, photo options, video options, professional options, more options), etc. Switching background controls are also displayed on the second area and the third area, such as control 906, control 907, control 908, control 909, and control 910. The picture 905 displayed on the second area has no background effect, then the electronic device 100 can highlight the control 906 (for example, darken the display area where the control 906 is located).
可选的,电子设备100可以同时识别到多个不同的目标物体,电子设备100可以将多个不同的目标物体的图像同时显示在第三区域上。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display images of multiple different target objects on the third area at the same time.
可选的,电子设备100可以同时识别到多个不同的目标物体,电子设备100可以给出提示信息,让用户选择将多个不同的目标物体中的一个或多个目标物体,并将用户选择的一个或多个目标物体的图像显示在第三区域上。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can give prompt information to allow the user to select one or more target objects among the multiple different target objects, and prompt the user to select the target object. Images of one or more target objects are displayed on the third area.
示例性的,如图9B所示,电子设备100接收用户针对控件907的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,如图9C所示,电子设备100在第三区域上添加背景一的显示效果,第三区域上显示图片911。可选的,电子设备100可以将控件907突出显示(例如将控件907所在的显示区域加深显示)。这样,电子设备100可以更改目标物体的背景效果,提升拍照体验。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 9B , the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (for example, click) on the control 907 , and in response to the user's input operation, as shown in FIG. 9C , the electronic device 100 adds a background on the third area. The first display effect, the third area displays picture 911. Optionally, the electronic device 100 can highlight the control 907 (for example, darken the display area where the control 907 is located). In this way, the electronic device 100 can change the background effect of the target object and improve the photographing experience.
可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将第三区域上显示的更换背景后的图片保存至相册。Optionally, the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the background-changed picture displayed in the third area to the album.
可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对图片911的输入操作(例如长按操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将图片911保存至相册。Optionally, the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on the picture 911, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 911 to the album.
示例性的,如图9C所示,电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作例如单击作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将图片911保存至图库。可选的,电子设备可以更改略缩图显示区域304的显示形式,如图9D所示。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 9C , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 911 to the gallery. Optionally, the electronic device can change the display form of the thumbnail display area 304, as shown in Figure 9D.
图9E-图9G示例性示出了另一种电子设备100切换目标物体的背景示意图。9E to 9G exemplarily illustrate a background schematic diagram of another electronic device 100 switching a target object.
参考前9A的描述,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示相机界面901,在第三区域显示电子设备100识别到的目标物体的图像。Referring to the description in the previous 9A, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the camera interface 901 on the second area, and display the image of the target object recognized by the electronic device 100 on the third area.
如图9E所示,电子设备100展开卷轴屏之后,分割线903的左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线903的右侧的显示区域为第三区域。As shown in FIG. 9E , after the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, the display area to the left of the dividing line 903 is the second area, and the display area to the right of the dividing line 903 is the third area.
电子设备100在第二区域上显示相机界面901,在第三区域上显示电子设备100识别到的画面902里的目标物体的图片912。图片912内仅包括目标物体的图像。The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 901 in the second area, and displays the picture 912 of the target object in the screen 902 recognized by the electronic device 100 in the third area. The picture 912 only includes the image of the target object.
可选的,电子设备100可以同时识别到多个不同的目标物体,电子设备100可以将多个不同的目标物体的图像同时显示在第三区域上。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can display images of multiple different target objects on the third area at the same time.
可选的,电子设备100可以同时识别到多个不同的目标物体,电子设备100可以给出提示信息,让用户选择将多个不同的目标物体中的一个或多个目标物体,并将用户选择的一个或多个目标物体的图像显示在第三区域上。 Optionally, the electronic device 100 can recognize multiple different target objects at the same time, and the electronic device 100 can give prompt information to allow the user to select one or more target objects among the multiple different target objects, and prompt the user to select the target object. Images of one or more target objects are displayed on the third area.
示例性的,如图9E所示,电子设备100接收用户针对控件907的输入操作(例如单击),响应于用户的输入操作,如图9F所示,电子设备100在第三区域上添加背景一的显示效果,第三区域上显示图片913。可选的,电子设备100可以将控件907突出显示(例如将控件907所在的显示区域加深显示)。这样,电子设备100可以更改目标物体的背景效果,提升拍照体验。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 9E , the electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (for example, click) on the control 907 , and in response to the user's input operation, as shown in FIG. 9F , the electronic device 100 adds a background on the third area. The first display effect, the third area displays picture 913. Optionally, the electronic device 100 can highlight the control 907 (for example, darken the display area where the control 907 is located). In this way, the electronic device 100 can change the background effect of the target object and improve the photographing experience.
可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将第三区域上显示的更换背景后的图片保存至相册。Optionally, the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the background-changed picture displayed in the third area to the album.
可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对图片913的输入操作(例如长按操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将图片913保存至相册。Optionally, the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on the picture 913, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 913 to the album.
示例性的,如图9G所示,电子设备100接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作例如单击作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将图片913保存至图库。可选的,电子设备100可以更改略缩图显示区域304的显示形式,如图9G所示。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 9G , the electronic device 100 receives a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303 , and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 913 to the gallery. Optionally, the electronic device 100 can change the display form of the thumbnail display area 304, as shown in FIG. 9G.
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示电子设备100摄像头采集的画面的不同尺寸的图片。可选的,该不同尺寸的图片可以是预设的尺寸,也可以是电子设备100输出提示信息,提示用户选择不同尺寸,并显示用户选择的尺寸的图片。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2. The electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 may display the first camera interface in the second area, and display pictures of different sizes captured by the camera of the electronic device 100 in the third area. Optionally, the pictures of different sizes may be preset sizes, or the electronic device 100 may output prompt information to prompt the user to select different sizes, and display pictures of the size selected by the user.
图10A示例性示出了电子设备100显示不同尺寸的图片的背景示意图。FIG. 10A schematically illustrates a background diagram in which the electronic device 100 displays pictures of different sizes.
参考前图4B所示,电子设备100显示相机界面302,相机界面302内显示有画面306,相机界面302所在的显示区域为第一区域。Referring to FIG. 4B , the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 302, a picture 306 is displayed in the camera interface 302, and the display area where the camera interface 302 is located is the first area.
之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏,卷轴屏的显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 unfolds the scroll screen, and the display area of the scroll screen includes a second area and a third area.
其中,操作二是使得电子设备100展开卷轴屏的操作,操作二具体可以是作用在显示屏上的滑动手势(例如双指滑动手势或者三指滑动手势)、点击手势、叩击手势、作用在电子设备100上的硬件的操作等。The second operation is to make the electronic device 100 unfold the scroll screen. The second operation may specifically be a sliding gesture (such as a two-finger sliding gesture or a three-finger sliding gesture), a clicking gesture, a tapping gesture, or a sliding gesture acting on the display screen. Operation of hardware on the electronic device 100, etc.
在一些实施例中,操作二也可以是针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击)。In some embodiments, operation two may also be an input operation (for example, click) on the shooting control 303 .
如图10A所示,分割线307左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线307右侧的显示区域为第三区域。电子设备100在第二区域上显示相机界面302,在第三区域上显示图片1001和图片1002。其中,图片1001和图片1002的尺寸不同。As shown in FIG. 10A , the display area on the left side of the dividing line 307 is the second area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 307 is the third area. The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 302 on the second area, and displays the picture 1001 and the picture 1002 on the third area. Among them, the sizes of picture 1001 and picture 1002 are different.
不仅限于电子设备100在第三区域显示两张不同尺寸的图片,电子设备100也可以在第三区域上显示多张(例如三张或四张)不同尺寸的图片。The electronic device 100 is not limited to displaying two pictures of different sizes in the third area. The electronic device 100 can also display multiple (for example, three or four) pictures of different sizes in the third area.
可选的,在电子设备100展开扩展屏后,电子设备100可以继续接收用户的操作,使电子设备100的卷轴屏继续展开,由于卷轴屏的显示区域变大,那么电子设备100可以中显示更多不同尺寸的图片。Optionally, after the electronic device 100 expands the extended screen, the electronic device 100 can continue to receive user operations so that the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 continues to expand. Since the display area of the scroll screen becomes larger, the electronic device 100 can display more information in the screen. Many pictures of different sizes.
可选的,随着卷轴屏的显示区域变化,卷轴屏显示的不同尺寸的图片的排列显示效果也可以发生变化。Optionally, as the display area of the scroll screen changes, the arrangement and display effect of pictures of different sizes displayed on the scroll screen can also change.
可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作(例如单击操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将多个不同尺寸的图片保存至相册。 Optionally, the electronic device 100 can receive a user's input operation (such as a click operation) on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves multiple pictures of different sizes to the album.
可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对第三区域上显示的一个或多个图片的输入操作(例如长按操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将用户选中的图片保存至相册保。Optionally, the electronic device 100 can receive a user's input operation (such as a long press operation) on one or more pictures displayed on the third area, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture selected by the user to the album. Save.
电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示配件,用户可以将第三区域上显示的配件移动至第一相机界面上,以此提高用户的拍照效果。The electronic device 100 is in the first state. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded. The electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation 1 and displays the first area in the displayed first area. 1. Camera interface. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 receives the user's operation 2. The electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 can display the first camera interface in the second area and display accessories in the third area. The user can move the accessories displayed in the third area to the first camera interface, thereby improving the user's photography effect.
图11A-图11B示例性示出了电子设备100显示配件的示意图。11A-11B exemplarily illustrate schematic diagrams of the electronic device 100 displaying accessories.
参考前述图9A所示,电子设备100显示相机界面901,相机界面901所在的区域为第一区域,相机界面901也可以被称为第一相机界面。Referring to the aforementioned FIG. 9A , the electronic device 100 displays a camera interface 901 . The area where the camera interface 901 is located is the first area. The camera interface 901 may also be called the first camera interface.
电子设备100接收用户的操作二,响应于用户的操作二,电子设备100展开扩展屏,并显示如图11A所示的界面。在图11A中,分割线903左侧的显示区域为第二区域,分割线904右侧的显示区域为第三区域。电子设备100在第三区域上显示相机界面901,在第三区域上显示一种或多种类型的配件。例如,帽子配件、围巾配件、饰品配件等。The electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation. In response to the user's second operation, the electronic device 100 expands the expansion screen and displays the interface as shown in FIG. 11A . In FIG. 11A , the display area on the left side of the dividing line 903 is the second area, and the display area on the right side of the dividing line 904 is the third area. The electronic device 100 displays the camera interface 901 on the third area, and displays one or more types of accessories on the third area. For example, hat accessories, scarf accessories, jewelry accessories, etc.
电子设备100可以接收用户作用在第三区域上的滑动操作(例如向上滑动操作),响应于用户的滑动操作,电子设备100将在第三区域上显示其他未显示的匹配件。The electronic device 100 may receive a user's sliding operation (eg, an upward sliding operation) on the third area, and in response to the user's sliding operation, the electronic device 100 will display other undisplayed matching pieces on the third area.
如图11A所示,第三区域上显示有配件904,配件904为艺术字配件。电子设备100接收用户针对配件904的输入操作(例如长按及拖动操作),响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将配件904显示在相机界面901中,如图11B所示,相机界面901内包括画面903。图11B所示的画面903与图11A所示的所示的画面902不同之处在于,画面903多了配件904。As shown in Figure 11A, an accessory 904 is displayed on the third area, and the accessory 904 is a word art accessory. The electronic device 100 receives the user's input operation (such as long press and drag operation) on the accessory 904. In response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 displays the accessory 904 in the camera interface 901. As shown in FIG. 11B, the camera interface 901 Includes screen 903. The difference between the screen 903 shown in FIG. 11B and the screen 902 shown in FIG. 11A is that the screen 903 has an additional accessory 904 .
之后,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件303的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将画面903保存至图库中。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 can receive the user's input operation on the shooting control 303, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the picture 903 to the gallery.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100处于第一状态,电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,此时卷轴屏还未展开,电子设备100接收并响应用户的操作一,在显示的第一区域显示第一相机界面,之后,电子设备100接收用户的操作二,电子设备100展开卷轴屏。电子设备100的卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域。电子设备100可以在第二区域上显示第一相机界面,在第三区域上显示图片编辑页面,图片编辑页面包括摄像头采集的画面和多个编辑控件。电子设备100可以接收用户作用在相机编辑页面上的多个编辑控件的输入操作,使得用户可以对摄像头采集的画面进行编辑,例如增加滤镜,使用特效(例如“瘦身”特效)等。可选的,电子设备100可以接收用户针对拍摄控件的输入操作,响应于用户的输入操作,电子设备100将第三区域上显示的用户编辑后的图片保存至相册。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 is in the first state, and the displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes the first area. At this time, the scroll screen has not been unfolded, and the electronic device 100 receives and responds to the user's operation. After displaying The first area displays the first camera interface. After that, the electronic device 100 receives the user's second operation, and the electronic device 100 expands the scroll screen. The displayable area of the scroll screen of the electronic device 100 includes a second area and a third area. The electronic device 100 can display the first camera interface on the second area, and display a picture editing page on the third area. The picture editing page includes pictures collected by the camera and a plurality of editing controls. The electronic device 100 can receive user input operations on multiple editing controls on the camera editing page, so that the user can edit the images captured by the camera, such as adding filters, using special effects (such as "slimming" special effects), etc. Optionally, the electronic device 100 may receive a user's input operation on the shooting control, and in response to the user's input operation, the electronic device 100 saves the user-edited picture displayed in the third area to the photo album.
这样,电子设备100可以一边显示拍摄页面,一边对拍摄页面内显示的画面进行编辑,提升了用户的拍照体验。In this way, the electronic device 100 can display the photographing page while editing the pictures displayed in the photographing page, thereby improving the user's photographing experience.
可选,上述各个实施例也可以适用于折叠屏。Optionally, each of the above embodiments may also be applied to a folding screen.
图12A-图12C示例性示出了折叠屏的三种显示形态的示意图。12A-12C exemplarily show schematic diagrams of three display forms of the folding screen.
其中,图12A示例性示出了内折折叠屏形态示意图。该内折折叠屏可沿折叠边,将A屏和B屏互相朝着对方所在的方向进行翻折,可形成图12B所示半折叠形态的A屏和B屏。 该半折叠形态的折叠屏可沿折叠边将A屏和B屏互相朝着对方所在的方向继续进行翻折,可形成图12C所示完全展开形态的A屏和B屏。Among them, FIG. 12A exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the shape of an inward-folding folding screen. The inward-folding folding screen can fold the A screen and the B screen in the direction of each other along the folding edge to form the A screen and the B screen in the semi-folded form as shown in Figure 12B. The folding screen in the semi-folded form can continue to fold the A screen and the B screen in the direction of each other along the folding edge to form the fully unfolded A screen and B screen as shown in Figure 12C.
在本申请实施例中,当折叠屏未展开时,A屏或者B屏也可以被称为第一显示区域。当折叠屏被完全展开后。A屏所在的显示区域可以被称为第二显示区域或者第四显示区域。B屏所在的显示区域可以被称为第三显示区域或者第五显示区域。In this embodiment of the present application, when the folding screen is not unfolded, screen A or screen B may also be called the first display area. When the folding screen is fully unfolded. The display area where the A screen is located may be called the second display area or the fourth display area. The display area where screen B is located may be called the third display area or the fifth display area.
当折叠屏完全展开时,上述实施例提供的一种应用于卷轴屏的拍摄方法同样适用于该折叠屏。具体的,可以参考前述实施例的相关描述,本申请实施例在此不再赘述。When the folding screen is fully unfolded, the shooting method applied to the scroll screen provided in the above embodiment is also applicable to the folding screen. For details, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing embodiments, and the embodiments of the present application will not be described again here.
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种拍摄方法的流程示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a shooting method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
该方法应用于包括卷轴屏的电子设备,卷轴屏包括第一状态和第二状态,其中,在第一状态下,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,在第二状态下,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域;在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域大于在第一状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域。The method is applied to an electronic device including a scroll screen. The scroll screen includes a first state and a second state. In the first state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes the first area. In the second state, the scroll screen The displayable area includes a second area and a third area; the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the first state.
S1301、在卷轴屏处于第一状态下,电子设备在第一区域显示第一相机界面,第一相机界面包括在第一拍摄模式下通过第一摄像头实时采集的画面和第一拍摄控件。S1301. When the scroll screen is in the first state, the electronic device displays a first camera interface in the first area. The first camera interface includes images collected in real time by the first camera in the first shooting mode and first shooting controls.
S1302、电子设备接收到第一操作,将卷轴屏展开至第二状态。S1302. The electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state.
S1303、在卷轴屏处于第二状态下,电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面,第一相机界面和第二界面不同。S1303. When the scroll screen is in the second state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area. The first camera interface and the second interface are different.
第一区域可以是图4B中相机界面302所在的显示区域。第一相机界面可以是图4B中所示的相机界面302。The first area may be the display area where the camera interface 302 in FIG. 4B is located. The first camera interface may be camera interface 302 shown in Figure 4B.
第一拍摄模式可以是图4B所示的拍照模式。The first photographing mode may be the photographing mode shown in FIG. 4B.
第一摄像头实时采集的画面以是图4B中的画面306。The picture captured by the first camera in real time is picture 306 in Figure 4B.
第一拍摄控件可以是图4B所示的拍摄控件303。The first shooting control may be the shooting control 303 shown in FIG. 4B.
第二界面为以下任一一项:图库界面、第二相机界面、以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面、所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面中的目标物体图像。The second interface is any one of the following: a gallery interface, a second camera interface, a picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect, or a target object image in the picture collected in real time by the first camera.
当第二界面为图库界面时,请参考图6A-图6E中的相关描述。When the second interface is the gallery interface, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figures 6A to 6E.
当第二界面为第二相机界面时,请参考图4A-图4P中的相关描述。When the second interface is the second camera interface, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figures 4A to 4P.
当第二界面为以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面时,在第一效果为滤镜效果的情况下,请参考图5A-图5X中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图5A-图5X中所示的分割线307右侧的界面。在第一效果为背景效果的情况下,请参考图9A-图9G中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图9A-图9G中所示的分割线903右侧的界面。在第一效果为尺寸效果的情况下,请参考图10A中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图10A中所示的分割线307右侧的界面。当第二界面为所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面中的目标物体图像时,请参考图7A-图7H、图8A-图8F中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图7A-图7H中所示的分割线307右侧的界面,第二界面也可以是图8A-图8F中所示的分割线307右侧的界面。When the second interface is a picture collected by the first camera in real time processed with the first effect, and the first effect is a filter effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figure 5A to Figure 5X. The second interface can It is the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIGS. 5A to 5X. In the case where the first effect is a background effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 9A-9G. The second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 903 shown in FIGS. 9A-9G. In the case where the first effect is a size effect, please refer to the relevant description in Figure 10A. The second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in Figure 10A. When the second interface is the target object image in the screen collected in real time by the first camera, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figures 7A to 7H and Figure 8A to 8F. The second interface can be as shown in Figures 7A to 7H. The interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 is shown. The second interface may also be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F .
其中,当第二界面为第二相机界面时,即电子设备可以同时显示两个相机界面。在一种可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面。在其他可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面,第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。第二相机界面可以是图4D所示的相机界面311,或者图4F所示的相机界面311,或者图4G所示的相机界面311。 Wherein, when the second interface is the second camera interface, that is, the electronic device can display two camera interfaces at the same time. In a possible implementation, the second camera interface includes images captured by the second camera in real time in the second shooting mode. In other possible implementations, the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode, and the second camera interface includes images captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode and the second shooting control. . The second camera interface may be the camera interface 311 shown in FIG. 4D, or the camera interface 311 shown in FIG. 4F, or the camera interface 311 shown in FIG. 4G.
当第二界面为以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面时,以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面也可以被称为第一图片。第一图片的图片效果和第一摄像头实时采集的画面的画面效果不同。第一效果包括以下任一一项:滤镜效果、背景效果、尺寸效果、分辨率效果、清晰度效果。When the second interface is a picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with a first effect, the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect may also be called a first picture. The picture effect of the first picture is different from the picture effect of the picture collected in real time by the first camera. The first effect includes any of the following: filter effect, background effect, size effect, resolution effect, and clarity effect.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一拍摄模式与第二拍摄模式相同或不同,第一摄像头与第二摄像头不同。这样,第一相机界面和第二相机界面可以分别显示不同的摄像头,采用相同或者不同的拍摄模式采集画面,例如第一摄像头为前置摄像头,第二摄像头为后置摄像头。再例如,第一摄像头为后置摄像头中的主摄像头,第二摄像头为后置摄像头中的广角摄像头。In a possible implementation, the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are the same or different, and the first camera and the second camera are different. In this way, the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display different cameras and use the same or different shooting modes to collect images. For example, the first camera is a front-facing camera and the second camera is a rear-facing camera. For another example, the first camera is the main camera among the rear cameras, and the second camera is the wide-angle camera among the rear cameras.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一拍摄模式与第二拍摄模式不同,第一摄像头与第二摄像头相同。这样,第一相机界面和第二相机界面可以分别显示同一个摄像头,采用不同的拍摄模式采集画面。例如,第一摄像头和第二摄像头均为后置前置摄像头,第一拍摄模式为第一滤镜,第二拍摄模式为第二滤镜。这样,用户可以在自拍时,在第一相机界面和第二相机界面上分别显示不同的滤镜效果处理的画面,以便用户对比选择拍照效果更好的滤镜进行拍照。In a possible implementation, the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are different, and the first camera and the second camera are the same. In this way, the first camera interface and the second camera interface can respectively display the same camera and use different shooting modes to collect images. For example, the first camera and the second camera are both rear-facing and front-facing cameras, the first shooting mode is the first filter, and the second shooting mode is the second filter. In this way, when taking a selfie, the user can display images processed by different filter effects on the first camera interface and the second camera interface respectively, so that the user can compare and select a filter with better photo effects for taking photos.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:电子设备监测到针对第一拍摄控件的第二操作,将在第一拍摄模式下通过第一摄像头拍摄的画面保存至相册。在其他可能的实现方式中,电子设备监测到针对第二拍摄控件的第三操作,将在第二拍摄模式下通过第二摄像头拍摄的画面保存至相册。这样,用户可以分别控制将第一相机界面或者第二相机界面内显示的画面保存至相册。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the electronic device detects a second operation on the first shooting control, and saves the image captured by the first camera in the first shooting mode to the photo album. In other possible implementations, the electronic device detects the third operation on the second shooting control, and saves the image captured by the second camera in the second shooting mode to the photo album. In this way, the user can respectively control saving the images displayed in the first camera interface or the second camera interface to the photo album.
拍摄模式包括以下任意一项:夜景模式、人像模式、大光圈模式、拍照模式、录影模式、专业模式、延时模式、不同的焦距模式、不同的广角模式。Shooting modes include any of the following: night scene mode, portrait mode, large aperture mode, photo mode, video mode, professional mode, time-lapse mode, different focal length modes, and different wide-angle modes.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收并响应第四操作,在第二区域和第三区域上共同显示第三相机界面,第三相机界面包括第一摄像头在第一拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第一拍摄控件,或者,第三相机界面包括第二摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。这样,在电子设备显示第一相机界面和第二相机界面后,用户可以操作使得电子设备仅显示上述其中任意一个相机界面,使得该一个相机界面的显示面积变大,可以采集更丰富的画面。例如第三界面可以是是图4N所示的相机界面317。相机界面317可以是相机界面302扩大后的界面,或者相机界面317也可以是相机界面308扩大后的界面。In a possible implementation, after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device receives and responds to the fourth operation, and in the second area and A third camera interface is jointly displayed on the third area. The third camera interface includes real-time images collected by the first camera in the first shooting mode and the first shooting control. Alternatively, the third camera interface includes the second camera in the second shooting mode. Click the real-time captured image and the second shooting control. In this way, after the electronic device displays the first camera interface and the second camera interface, the user can operate the electronic device to display only any one of the above camera interfaces, so that the display area of the one camera interface becomes larger and richer images can be collected. For example, the third interface may be the camera interface 317 shown in FIG. 4N. The camera interface 317 may be an enlarged interface of the camera interface 302, or the camera interface 317 may also be an enlarged interface of the camera interface 308.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面还包括摄像头切换控件;在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在述第三区域显示第二界面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收并响应针对摄像头切换控件的第五操作,电子设备在第三区域显示第四相机界面,第四相机界面包括第三摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面,或者包括第三摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。这样,电子设备可以切换显示不同的摄像头采集的画面。摄像头切换控件可以是图4H所示的切换前置/后置摄像头控件313,第四相机界面可以是图4K所示的相机界面308,第三摄像头在第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面可以是图4K所示的画面315,第二拍摄控件可以是图4K所示的拍摄控件310。可选的,相机界面308也可以仅包括 画面315,可选的,相机界面308也可以仅包括画面315和拍摄控件310。In a possible implementation, the second camera interface also includes a camera switching control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device receives And in response to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area. The fourth camera interface includes the images collected by the third camera in real time in the second shooting mode, or includes the images captured by the third camera in the second shooting mode. Real-time captured footage and secondary shooting controls in shooting mode. In this way, the electronic device can switch to display images collected by different cameras. The camera switching control can be the front/rear camera switching control 313 shown in Figure 4H, the fourth camera interface can be the camera interface 308 shown in Figure 4K, and the real-time captured images of the third camera in the second shooting mode can be In the screen 315 shown in FIG. 4K, the second shooting control may be the shooting control 310 shown in FIG. 4K. Optionally, the camera interface 308 may also include only Screen 315, optionally, the camera interface 308 may also only include the screen 315 and the shooting control 310.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备接收并响应针对摄像头切换控件的第五操作,电子设备在所述第三区域显示第四相机界面,具体包括:电子设备接收并响应针对摄像头切换控件的所述第五操作,输出第一提示信息;在电子设备输出第一提示信息后,电子设备在述第三区域显示第四相机界面。这样,该提示信息用于提示用户,切换显示的是哪一个摄像头采集的画面。第一提示信息可以是图4I所示的提示信息333。In a possible implementation, the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, and the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area, specifically including: the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control. The fifth operation is to output the first prompt information; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area. In this way, the prompt information is used to prompt the user to switch the displayed image collected by which camera. The first prompt information may be prompt information 333 shown in Figure 4I.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备输出第一提示信息的同时,所述电子设备还显示有第一控件;在电子设备输出所述第一提示信息后,电子设备在第三区域显示第四相机界面,具体包括:在电子设备输出第一提示信息后,电子设备接收并响应针对第一控件的触发操作,电子设备在第三区域显示第四相机界面。这样,用户可以选择切换到哪一个摄像头。第一控件是图4J所示的“广角”控件。In a possible implementation, while the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device also displays the first control; after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device displays the first control in the third area. The fourth camera interface specifically includes: after the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device receives and responds to the trigger operation for the first control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area. This way, the user can choose which camera to switch to. The first control is the "wide angle" control shown in Figure 4J.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二相机界面还包括第三模式选择控件;在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收并响应针对第三模式选择控件的第六操作,电子设备在第三区域显示第五相机界面,第五相机界面包括第二摄像头在第三拍摄模式下实时采集的画面,或者包括第二摄像头在第三拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。这样,电子设备可以接收用户操作切换不同的拍照模式,例如由拍照模式切换为摄像模式。第三模式选择控件可以是图4L所示的“录像”模式控件。第五相机界面可以是图4M所示的相机界面308内的画面。In a possible implementation, the second camera interface further includes a third mode selection control; after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device Receive and respond to the sixth operation of the third mode selection control, and the electronic device displays a fifth camera interface in the third area. The fifth camera interface includes images captured by the second camera in real time in the third shooting mode, or includes the second camera. Real-time captured footage and secondary shooting controls in third shooting mode. In this way, the electronic device can receive a user's operation to switch between different photographing modes, for example, switching from photographing mode to video recording mode. The third mode selection control may be the "recording" mode control shown in Figure 4L. The fifth camera interface may be the screen in the camera interface 308 shown in FIG. 4M.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备在第三区域显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的同时,在第三区域显示以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面;其中,第一效果和第二效果不同。这里,以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面也可以被称为第二图片。这样,电子设备可以在第三区域同时显示多个不同画面效果处理的图片,以便用户对比不同画面效果处理的图片。In a possible implementation, the electronic device displays the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, and at the same time displays the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect in the third area. ; Among them, the first effect and the second effect are different. Here, the picture captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect may also be called the second picture. In this way, the electronic device can simultaneously display multiple pictures processed with different picture effects in the third area, so that the user can compare the pictures processed with different picture effects.
当第二界面为以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面时,在第一效果为滤镜效果的情况下,请参考图5A-图5X中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图5A-图5X中所示的分割线307右侧的界面,以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面可以是图5D所示的以滤镜一处理得到的图片502,以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面可以是图5D所示的以滤镜二处理得到的图片503。在第一效果为背景效果的情况下,请参考图9A-图9G中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图9A-图9G中所示的分割线903右侧的界面。在第一效果为尺寸效果的情况下,请参考图10A中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图10A中所示的分割线307右侧的界面。当第二界面为所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面中的目标物体图像时,请参考图7A-图7H、图8A-图8F中的相关描述,第二界面可以是图7A-图7H中所示的分割线307右侧的界面,第二界面也可以是图8A-图8F中所示的分割线307右侧的界面。When the second interface is a picture collected by the first camera in real time processed with the first effect, and the first effect is a filter effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figure 5A to Figure 5X. The second interface can It is the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in Figures 5A to 5X. The picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect can be the picture 502 processed with filter one shown in Figure 5D, with the first effect The picture captured in real time by the first camera processed by the second effect may be the picture 503 processed by the second filter as shown in FIG. 5D. In the case where the first effect is a background effect, please refer to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 9A-9G. The second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 903 shown in FIGS. 9A-9G. In the case where the first effect is a size effect, please refer to the relevant description in Figure 10A. The second interface may be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in Figure 10A. When the second interface is the target object image in the screen collected in real time by the first camera, please refer to the relevant descriptions in Figures 7A to 7H and Figure 8A to 8F. The second interface can be as shown in Figures 7A to 7H. The interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 is shown. The second interface may also be the interface on the right side of the dividing line 307 shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F .
在一种可能的实现方式中,卷轴屏还包括第三状态,在第三状态下,卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第四区域和第五区域,在第三状态下所述卷轴屏的可显示区域大于在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域;在电子设备将卷轴屏展开至第二状态之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第 七操作;响应于第七操作,电子设备将卷轴屏展开至第三状态;在卷轴屏处于第三状态下,电子设备在第四区域显示第一相机界面,在第五区域显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面;其中,第一效果和第二效果不同。这样,电子设备可以在卷轴屏继续展开后,显示其他效果处理的画面。In a possible implementation, the scroll screen also includes a third state. In the third state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a fourth area and a fifth area. In the third state, the displayable area of the scroll screen The area is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state; after the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state, the method also includes: the electronic device receives the third Seven operations; in response to the seventh operation, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the third state; while the scroll screen is in the third state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the fourth area and displays the first effect in the fifth area. The images captured by the first camera in real time are processed and the images captured by the first camera in real time are processed with the second effect; wherein the first effect and the second effect are different. In this way, the electronic device can display other effect-processed images after the scroll screen continues to expand.
以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面可以是图5H所示的以滤镜一处理得到的图片502,以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面可以是图5H所示的以滤镜二处理得到的图片503。The picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect may be the picture 502 processed by filter one as shown in Figure 5H, and the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect may be the picture shown in Figure 5H Image 503 obtained by applying filter 2.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:电子设备接收针对以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的第八操作;响应于第八操作,电子设备将以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面保存至相册。具体的,可以参考图5U-图5V所示的实施例。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the electronic device receives an eighth operation for the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the eighth operation, the electronic device uses the first effect processed with the The images captured by the first camera in real time are saved to the photo album. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 5U-5V.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:电子设备接收针对以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的第九操作;响应于第九操作,电子设备停止显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。即电子设备可以接收用户操作删除以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the electronic device receives a ninth operation for the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect; in response to the ninth operation, the electronic device stops displaying the image processed with the first effect The first camera captures the picture in real time. That is, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to delete the images collected by the first camera in real time and processed with the first effect.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第三区域显示以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的同时,在第三区域显示以第二效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第十操作;响应于第十操作,电子设备在第二区域上显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面,在第三区域上显示以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。这样,电子设备不显示相机界面,全屏显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面。具体的,可以参考图5I所示的实施例。In a possible implementation, while the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, the first image processed with the second effect is displayed in the third area. After the picture collected by the camera in real time, the method also includes: the electronic device receives the tenth operation; in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays the picture collected by the first camera in real time in the second area and processed with the first effect in the third area. The screen captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the second effect is displayed on the screen. In this way, the electronic device does not display the camera interface, but displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect and the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the second effect in full screen. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5I.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第二区域上显示以第一效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面,在第三区域上显示以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面之后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第十一操作;响应于第十一操作,电子设备调整第二区域和第三区域的大小,在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域不变。这样,电子设备可以调整以第以效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第二效果处理的第一摄像头实时采集的画面的尺寸大小。具体的,可以参考图5J-图5M、图5P-图5T所示的实施例。In a possible implementation, the electronic device displays the image captured in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect in the second area, and displays the image captured in real time by the first camera processed with the second effect in the third area. After the screen, the method also includes: the electronic device receives an eleventh operation; in response to the eleventh operation, the electronic device adjusts the size of the second area and the third area, and the displayable area of the scroll screen remains unchanged in the second state. In this way, the electronic device can adjust the size of the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with the third effect and the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed by the second effect. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 5J to 5M and 5P to 5T.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备接收到第一操作,将卷轴屏展开至第二状态,具体包括:电子设备接收到第一操作,输出第二提示信息;在电子设备输出第二提示信息后,电子设备将卷轴屏展开至第二状态。这样,避免用户误操作使得电子设备展开卷轴屏。具体的,可以参考图5E所示的实施例。In a possible implementation, the electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state, which specifically includes: the electronic device receives the first operation and outputs the second prompt information; the electronic device outputs the second prompt information. After receiving the message, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state. In this way, the user's misoperation is prevented from causing the electronic device to unfold the scroll screen. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in Figure 5E.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备在第二区域显示第一相机界面,在第三区域显示第二界面后,方法还包括:电子设备接收第十二操作;响应于第十二操作,电子设备在第二区域显示第二界面,在第三区域显示第一相机界面。这样,电子设备可以接收用户操作切换第二区域和第三区域上界面的显示位置。具体的,可以参考图5N-图5O所示的实施例。 In a possible implementation, after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and the second interface in the third area, the method further includes: the electronic device receives a twelfth operation; responds to the twelfth operation , the electronic device displays the second interface in the second area, and displays the first camera interface in the third area. In this way, the electronic device can receive the user's operation to switch the display position of the interface in the second area and the third area. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 5N to 5O.
本申请的各实施方式可以任意进行组合,以实现不同的技术效果。The various embodiments of the present application can be combined arbitrarily to achieve different technical effects.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in this application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments are implemented. This process can be completed by instructing relevant hardware through a computer program. The program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. When the program is executed, , may include the processes of the above method embodiments. The aforementioned storage media include: ROM, random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks, optical disks and other media that can store program codes.
总之,以上所述仅为本发明技术方案的实施例而已,并非用于限定本发明的保护范围。凡根据本发明的揭露,所作的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包含在本发明的保护范围之内。 In short, the above descriptions are only examples of the technical solutions of the present invention and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Any modifications, equivalent substitutions, improvements, etc. made based on the disclosure of the present invention shall be included in the protection scope of the present invention.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种拍摄方法,应用于包括卷轴屏的电子设备,其特征在于,所述卷轴屏包括第一状态和第二状态,其中,在所述第一状态下,所述卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第一区域,在所述第二状态下,所述卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第二区域和第三区域;在所述第二状态下所述卷轴屏的可显示区域大于在所述第一状态下所述卷轴屏的可显示区域;所述方法包括:A shooting method, applied to an electronic device including a scroll screen, characterized in that the scroll screen includes a first state and a second state, wherein in the first state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes A first area, in the second state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a second area and a third area; in the second state, the displayable area of the scroll screen is larger than that in the first The displayable area of the scroll screen in the state; the method includes:
    在所述卷轴屏处于所述第一状态下,所述电子设备在所述第一区域显示第一相机界面,所述第一相机界面包括在第一拍摄模式下通过第一摄像头实时采集的画面和第一拍摄控件;When the scroll screen is in the first state, the electronic device displays a first camera interface in the first area, and the first camera interface includes images captured in real time by the first camera in the first shooting mode. and first shooting controls;
    所述电子设备接收到第一操作,将所述卷轴屏展开至所述第二状态;The electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state;
    在所述卷轴屏处于所述第二状态下,所述电子设备在所述第二区域显示所述第一相机界面,在所述第三区域显示第二界面,所述第一界面和所述第二相机界面不同。When the scroll screen is in the second state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays a second interface in the third area. The first interface and the The second camera interface is different.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面为以下任一一项:图库界面、第二相机界面、以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面、所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面中的目标物体图像。The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the second interface is any one of the following: a gallery interface, a second camera interface, a picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with a first effect, The first camera captures an image of the target object in the screen in real time.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面。The method of claim 2, wherein the second camera interface includes images collected in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode.
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二相机界面包括在第二拍摄模式下第二摄像头实时采集的画面和第二拍摄控件。The method of claim 2, wherein the second camera interface includes real-time images collected by the second camera in the second shooting mode and a second shooting control.
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,以第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的画面效果和所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的画面效果不同。The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the picture effect of the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect is different from the picture effect of the picture collected in real time by the first camera.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一效果包括以下任一一项:滤镜效果、背景效果、尺寸效果、分辨率效果、清晰度效果。The method of claim 5, wherein the first effect includes any one of the following: filter effect, background effect, size effect, resolution effect, and clarity effect.
  7. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄模式与所述第二拍摄模式相同或不同,所述第一摄像头与所述第二摄像头不同。The method according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are the same or different, and the first camera and the second camera are different.
  8. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一拍摄模式与所述第二拍摄模式不同,所述第一摄像头与所述第二摄像头相同。The method according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that the first shooting mode and the second shooting mode are different, and the first camera and the second camera are the same.
  9. 根据权利要求4或者7-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 4 or 7-8, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述电子设备监测到针对所述第一拍摄控件的第二操作,将在所述第一拍摄模式下通过所述第一摄像头拍摄的画面保存至相册。The electronic device detects the second operation of the first shooting control, and saves the picture taken by the first camera in the first shooting mode to a photo album.
  10. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 4, further comprising:
    所述电子设备监测到针对所述第二拍摄控件的第三操作,将在所述第二拍摄模式下通过所述第二摄像头拍摄的画面保存至相册。 The electronic device detects the third operation on the second shooting control, and saves the picture taken by the second camera in the second shooting mode to a photo album.
  11. 根据权利要求7-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,拍摄模式包括以下任意一项:夜景模式、人像模式、大光圈模式、拍照模式、录影模式、专业模式、延时模式、不同的焦距模式、不同的广角模式。The method according to any one of claims 7-10, characterized in that the shooting mode includes any one of the following: night scene mode, portrait mode, large aperture mode, photo mode, video mode, professional mode, time-lapse mode, different focal length modes, different wide-angle modes.
  12. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备在所述第二区域显示所述第一相机界面,在所述第三区域显示第二界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 4, wherein after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays the second interface in the third area, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收并响应第四操作,在所述第二区域和所述第三区域上共同显示第三相机界面,所述第三相机界面包括所述第一摄像头在所述第一拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和所述第一拍摄控件,或者,所述第三相机界面包括所述第二摄像头在所述第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和所述第二拍摄控件。The electronic device receives and responds to the fourth operation and jointly displays a third camera interface on the second area and the third area. The third camera interface includes the first camera in the first shooting mode. or the third camera interface includes the picture captured in real time by the second camera in the second shooting mode and the second shooting control.
  13. 根据权利要求3-4或者7-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二相机界面还包括摄像头切换控件;在所述电子设备在所述第二区域显示所述第一相机界面,在所述第三区域显示第二界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 3-4 or 7-11, characterized in that the second camera interface further includes a camera switching control; when the electronic device displays the first Camera interface, after the second interface is displayed in the third area, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收并响应针对所述摄像头切换控件的第五操作,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示第四相机界面,所述第四相机界面包括第三摄像头在所述第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面,或者包括所述第三摄像头在所述第二拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和所述第二拍摄控件。The electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area, and the fourth camera interface includes a third camera in the second shooting area. The picture collected in real time in the second shooting mode, or the picture collected in real time by the third camera in the second shooting mode and the second shooting control.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备接收并响应针对所述摄像头切换控件的第五操作,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示第四相机界面,具体包括:The method of claim 13, wherein the electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation of the camera switching control, and the electronic device displays a fourth camera interface in the third area, specifically including:
    所述电子设备接收并响应针对所述摄像头切换控件的所述第五操作,输出第一提示信息;The electronic device receives and responds to the fifth operation on the camera switching control and outputs first prompt information;
    在所述电子设备输出所述第一提示信息后,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第四相机界面。After the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备输出所述第一提示信息的同时,所述电子设备还显示有第一控件;所述在所述电子设备输出所述第一提示信息后,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第四相机界面,具体包括:The method of claim 14, wherein while the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device also displays a first control; After a prompt message, the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area, which specifically includes:
    在所述电子设备输出所述第一提示信息后,所述电子设备接收并响应针对所述第一控件的触发操作,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示所述第四相机界面。After the electronic device outputs the first prompt information, the electronic device receives and responds to the trigger operation for the first control, and the electronic device displays the fourth camera interface in the third area.
  16. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二相机界面还包括第三模式选择控件;在所述电子设备在所述第二区域显示所述第一相机界面,在所述第三区域显示第二界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 9, wherein the second camera interface further includes a third mode selection control; when the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area, in the third After the second interface is displayed in the three areas, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收并响应针对所述第三模式选择控件的第六操作,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示第五相机界面,所述第五相机界面包括所述第二摄像头在所述第三拍摄模式下实时采集的画面,或者包括所述第二摄像头在所述第三拍摄模式下实时采集的画面和所述第二拍摄控件。The electronic device receives and responds to the sixth operation of the third mode selection control, the electronic device displays a fifth camera interface in the third area, the fifth camera interface includes the second camera in the The picture collected in real time in the third shooting mode may include the picture collected in real time by the second camera in the third shooting mode and the second shooting control.
  17. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的同时,在所述第三区域显示以第二效 果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面;其中,所述第一效果和所述第二效果不同。The method according to claim 5 or 6, characterized in that, while the electronic device displays the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, The three-area display uses the second effect The images collected by the first camera in real time are processed as a result; wherein the first effect and the second effect are different.
  18. 根据权利要求5-6或者权利要求17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述卷轴屏还包括第三状态,在所述第三状态下,所述卷轴屏的可显示区域包括第四区域和第五区域,在所述第三状态下所述卷轴屏的可显示区域大于在所述第二状态下所述卷轴屏的可显示区域;在所述电子设备将所述卷轴屏展开至所述第二状态之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 5-6 or 17, characterized in that the scroll screen further includes a third state, and in the third state, the displayable area of the scroll screen includes a third state. The fourth area and the fifth area, the displayable area of the scroll screen in the third state is larger than the displayable area of the scroll screen in the second state; when the electronic device unfolds the scroll screen After reaching the second state, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收第七操作;The electronic device receives a seventh operation;
    响应于所述第七操作,所述电子设备将所述卷轴屏展开至所述第三状态;In response to the seventh operation, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the third state;
    在所述卷轴屏处于所述第三状态下,所述电子设备在所述第四区域显示所述第一相机界面,在所述第五区域显示以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面和以第三效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面;其中,所述第一效果和所述第三效果不同。When the scroll screen is in the third state, the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the fourth area, and displays the first image processed with the first effect in the fifth area. The picture captured in real time by the camera and the picture captured in real time by the first camera processed with a third effect; wherein the first effect and the third effect are different.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17 or 18, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收针对以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的第八操作;The electronic device receives an eighth operation for the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect;
    响应于所述第八操作,所述电子设备将以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面保存至相册。In response to the eighth operation, the electronic device saves the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect to a photo album.
  20. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17 or 18, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收针对以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的第九操作;The electronic device receives a ninth operation for the picture collected in real time by the first camera processed with the first effect;
    响应于所述第九操作,所述电子设备停止显示以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面。In response to the ninth operation, the electronic device stops displaying the images captured by the first camera in real time and processed with the first effect.
  21. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备在所述第三区域显示以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面的同时,在所述第三区域显示以第二效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17, characterized in that while the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect in the third area, After the area displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the second effect, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收第十操作;The electronic device receives a tenth operation;
    响应于所述第十操作,所述电子设备在所述第二区域上显示以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面,在所述第三区域上显示以第二效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面。In response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays the real-time captured image of the first camera processed with the first effect on the second area, and displays the image captured with the second effect on the third area. Process the pictures collected by the first camera in real time.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备在所述第二区域上显示以所述第一效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面,在所述第三区域上显示以第二效果处理的所述第一摄像头实时采集的画面之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21, characterized in that, after the electronic device displays the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the first effect on the second area, in the third area After displaying the real-time captured images of the first camera processed with the second effect, the method further includes:
    所述电子设备接收第十一操作;The electronic device receives an eleventh operation;
    响应于所述第十一操作,所述电子设备调整所述第二区域和所述第三区域的大小,在第二状态下卷轴屏的可显示区域不变。In response to the eleventh operation, the electronic device adjusts the size of the second area and the third area, and the displayable area of the scroll screen remains unchanged in the second state.
  23. 根据权利要求1-22任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备接收到第一操作,将所述卷轴屏展开至所述第二状态,具体包括: The method according to any one of claims 1-22, characterized in that the electronic device receives the first operation and expands the scroll screen to the second state, specifically including:
    所述电子设备接收到所述第一操作,输出第二提示信息;The electronic device receives the first operation and outputs second prompt information;
    在所述电子设备输出所述第二提示信息后,所述电子设备将所述卷轴屏展开至所述第二状态。After the electronic device outputs the second prompt information, the electronic device expands the scroll screen to the second state.
  24. 根据权利要求1-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备在所述第二区域显示所述第一相机界面,在所述第三区域显示第二界面后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that after the electronic device displays the first camera interface in the second area and displays the second interface in the third area, The above methods also include:
    所述电子设备接收第十二操作;The electronic device receives a twelfth operation;
    响应于所述第十二操作,所述电子设备在所述第二区域显示所述第二界面,在所述第三区域显示所述第一相机界面。In response to the twelfth operation, the electronic device displays the second interface in the second area and displays the first camera interface in the third area.
  25. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、卷轴屏、一个或多个存储器;其中,所述卷轴屏、所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,所述一个或多个处理器调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行上述权利要求1-24任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a scroll screen, and one or more memories; wherein the scroll screen, the one or more memories and the one or more A plurality of processors are coupled, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and the one or more processors call the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute the above-mentioned The method of any one of claims 1-24.
  26. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行上述权利要求1-24任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium used to store computer instructions, which when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute the method described in any one of claims 1-24.
  27. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行上述权利要求1-24任一项所述的方法。 A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, it causes the electronic device to execute the method described in any one of claims 1-24.
PCT/CN2023/084524 2022-03-30 2023-03-28 Photographing method and electronic device WO2023185886A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210326148.9 2022-03-30
CN202210326148.9A CN116939093A (en) 2022-03-30 2022-03-30 Shooting method and electronic equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023185886A1 true WO2023185886A1 (en) 2023-10-05

Family

ID=88199268

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/084524 WO2023185886A1 (en) 2022-03-30 2023-03-28 Photographing method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116939093A (en)
WO (1) WO2023185886A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170075640A1 (en) * 2015-09-11 2017-03-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for measuring angles between displays and electronic device using the same
US20170293383A1 (en) * 2014-10-01 2017-10-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Portable device and method for controlling same
CN110401766A (en) * 2019-05-22 2019-11-01 华为技术有限公司 A kind of image pickup method and terminal
CN111263005A (en) * 2020-01-21 2020-06-09 华为技术有限公司 Display method and related device of folding screen
CN113824878A (en) * 2021-08-20 2021-12-21 荣耀终端有限公司 Shooting control method based on foldable screen and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170293383A1 (en) * 2014-10-01 2017-10-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Portable device and method for controlling same
US20170075640A1 (en) * 2015-09-11 2017-03-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for measuring angles between displays and electronic device using the same
CN110401766A (en) * 2019-05-22 2019-11-01 华为技术有限公司 A kind of image pickup method and terminal
CN111263005A (en) * 2020-01-21 2020-06-09 华为技术有限公司 Display method and related device of folding screen
CN113824878A (en) * 2021-08-20 2021-12-21 荣耀终端有限公司 Shooting control method based on foldable screen and electronic equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116939093A (en) 2023-10-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110401766B (en) Shooting method and terminal
WO2021093793A1 (en) Capturing method and electronic device
JP7142783B2 (en) Voice control method and electronic device
CN112217923B (en) Display method of flexible screen and terminal
WO2022068537A1 (en) Image processing method and related apparatus
WO2021036571A1 (en) Desktop editing method and electronic device
WO2021213164A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
CN112714901A (en) Display control method of system navigation bar, graphical user interface and electronic equipment
WO2021082835A1 (en) Method for activating function and electronic device
CN110633043A (en) Split screen processing method and terminal equipment
WO2021238370A1 (en) Display control method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium
CN113891009B (en) Exposure adjusting method and related equipment
WO2022184173A1 (en) Card widget display method, graphical user interface, and related apparatus
WO2022262475A1 (en) Image capture method, graphical user interface, and electronic device
WO2023051511A1 (en) Icon moving method, related graphical interface, and electronic device
CN113170037A (en) Method for shooting long exposure image and electronic equipment
WO2023241209A1 (en) Desktop wallpaper configuration method and apparatus, electronic device and readable storage medium
WO2021042878A1 (en) Photography method and electronic device
CN112150499A (en) Image processing method and related device
WO2022143180A1 (en) Collaborative display method, terminal device, and computer readable storage medium
CN113949803A (en) Photographing method and electronic equipment
CN113448658A (en) Screen capture processing method, graphical user interface and terminal
WO2022143118A1 (en) Image processing method and electronic device
CN114173005B (en) Application layout control method and device, terminal equipment and computer readable storage medium
WO2023185886A1 (en) Photographing method and electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23778251

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1